Home

Dodge 2008 JS Avenger Sedan Automobile User Manual

Contents

1. 0 0 398 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N U E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 398 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to assure the continued proper functioning of the emission control system These and all other maintenance services included in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service also should be done any time a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sion control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part which has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Chang
2. 334 Head Restraints llle ees 116 Head Rests 4 ie RERO CRESCE 116 Headlights Bulb Replacement nis seiad aile inga neni 389 Dimmer Switch eie cao aeeie 00000 eee 124 Replacing ss scs cds x WE ae XE We a 389 Switch ike kde ERRARE RR 123 Heated Seats ud aca e Teac dea RD aoe dra 116 Heater Engine Block 2s ems 248 High Beam Indicator 000000 170 en INDEX 423 Hitches Trailer TOWING 06 62549 2440 xem x ey 319 Holder Coin i c ek ke ee kh Cea e 152 Holder Cup i i bn e y ES 151 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 137 Hood Release leen 121 HOS S aide Ee REOR PG SERRE ES 371 372 Hydraulic Clutch Fluid 00040 375 lentor 22e one ore RR DIR e cae s 12 Key ios ee e wy ex Dorp YE 12 Ignition Key Removal esses 12 Ill minated Entry esi b ee 19 Immobilizer Sentry Key 004 14 Infant Restraint u ket iinei ee 66 67 Inflation Pressure Tires 00 000 eee 288 Information Center Vehicle 184 Inside Rearview Mirror sess 83 Instrument Cluster lesen 167 168 Instrument Panel and Controls 166 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 381 Integrated Power Module Fuses 381 Interior Appearance Care 004 380 Interior Lights sse RI RR 122 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 126 Introduction suc lr R9 EER
3. Normal Starting s sece ger re Ra 245 Shift Lock Manual Override If Equipped 253 Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or Brake Transmission Interlock System 254 209C lilss3izxde3ues UR Yon RR SUR GR 246 4 Speed Automatic Transmission 3 7L If Engine Fails To Start 0 246 Engine sce ster ess Maree dial la 255 After Starting osse dere hie undo A 248 5 Speed Automatic Transmission 4 0L H Engine Block Heater If Equipped 248 PAGE PERERA TRIDENT SSIS Ges ae Gear Ranges rne iene a Ola ee ee GROS 0 260 242 STARTING AND OPERATING ME ll Four Wheel Drive Operation 265 MP 143 Single Speed Part Time Transfer Case lt Equipped 55 aie cea ated epe ers 265 Shifting Procedure Electronically Shifted Transter Case i e cse fiona ets beat 266 MP 140 Single Speed Full Time Transfer Case If Equipped 54s ss repr eER RET 267 H On Road Driving Tips 00 0 268 Bl Off Road Driving Tips 268 When To Use 4L Or 4LO Low Range 268 Driving Through Water 268 Driving In Snow Mud And Sand 270 Hill Climbing 0 0000 270 Traction Downhill 00005 271 After Driving Off Road E Parking Brake ll Anti Lock Brake System ll Power Steering H Tire Safety Information Tire Markings Tire Identi
4. 113 80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Front Seat Adjustment Recline 114 Lights On Reminder 124 6 Way Driver s Power Seat With Manual Headlight Dimmer Switch 124 Recline i kde rer der a ea pared 115 Passing Light cscsseeeeceeeees 124 Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat 116 Front Fog Lights If Equipped 124 Head Restraints uc cese yen es 116 Turn Signal cesses eee 125 Heated Seats If Equipped 116 Daytime Running Lights If Equipped 125 60 40 Split Folding Rear Seat With Fold Plat ig Mi Windshield Wipers And Washers 125 ll To Open And Close The Hood 121 Intermittent Wiper System 126 lights 122 MD a OPS aEOnL 2 a a Gee ue Interior LightS x cse ee eas 122 WORSE VIAS esti ab aac vee nee Multi Function Control Lever 123 IIS CRON ey lind sped eqni Pa wa ne Parking Lights Instrument Panel Lights H Tilt Steering Column xis e 127 And Headlights serve ERR 123 W Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 128 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81 Electronic Speed Control Operation 128 TO AChVate gos se deed e ake ae eras 128 To Set
5. Certification Label 0 0 0000 4 313 244 STARTING AND OPERATING ME la Trailer Towing erreso cage ida See aa es 315 Towing Requirements 0005 324 Common Towing Definitions 315 lowing lipS o s 3 ado net ease eee Sao 329 Trailer Hitch Classification 319 W Recreational Towing Behind Motorhome Etc 330 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Towing 2WD Models 330 Weight Ratings 22r e RES 320 Towing 4WD Or All Wheel Drive Models 331 Trailer And Tongue Weight 323 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 245 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belts CAUTION Long periods of engine idling especially at high engine speeds can cause excessive exhaust tempera tures which can damage your vehicle Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the engine running WARNING Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death Manual Transmission Apply the parking brake place the gearshift control lever in N Neutral and depress the clutch pedal before starting vehicle This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking ignition system It will not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor
6. 00 000s 287 High Speed erseree c hia ea ade eS 290 Inflation Pressures 1 0 ee eee ee 288 Jacking wiesen Eb ER phe RR coeds 336 lite of Tires 2222 RE eR REA 292 Load Capacity m RR 283 284 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 296 Quality Grading 00000000 412 Radial iua exa cae aan to ch Poem Saw ah 290 Replacement oranana 0 0 292 Rotation ex 86404 eee bea pec whee hes 295 Safety 6 hed doceo IRR ones e ue teased 78 279 SIZES sds eta mede cbe bad Qu ges ae e oa 280 Spare Tire iua ade Sea ae d EROR we ew nd 337 SPINNING 6 25 Achat dan SE ERA PO de be qc ae s 290 Tread Wear Indicators llle 291 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 323 Torque Converter Clutch 0 259 264 TOWING uerbi d pee eed a CER base C3 315 Disabled Vehicle llle 343 Guide 4 used eR PERPE 320 Recreational leen 330 Weight 42b hr Reb Re Eds 320 Traction Control 0 2 0 0 00 cee eae 132 173 Trailer Towing z agurea ana AnA KEE A 315 Cooling System Tips 0000 330 Hitehes i2 eise od 4e RR ERG DOE ys 319 Minimum Requirements isses 324 Trailer and Tongue Weight 323 Wirig 29 9 d 9 dme races ales 327 Trailer Towing Guide 0 00 320 Trailer Weight i cd eodd ne deme bad oth ets 320 Transaxle sores doses eodem ttm cd 252 Automatic 3233433432493 9 99 wp Aw EP 252 Operation adus aeria raten rd CR dE S 252 Transter Ca
7. Control Buttons 0000200 181 Trip Condilions 2 cose eee eae ae ae 182 Compass Temperature Display 182 i Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped isse rem esas 184 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays 4 sse RR RR Rx ee Oil Change Required Trip Functions sasana m eg eae 3 188 Compass Display 004 189 Telephone If Equipped 191 Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features a ieag engeehade RP RENDER 193 lll Radio General Information 196 Radio Broadcast Signals 196 164 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS See Two Types Of Signals 196 W Sales Code RES AM FM Stereo Radio With Electrical Disturbances 5 196 I reyes RAVEN ag aint deas datos Aa AM Reception iiis 197 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 213 FM Reception isses 197 le m d i b d bt m Am us dins MERIT Notes On Playing MP3Files 00 20 Jack suu acc icex EEEE TEE ETEEN ER 197 List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 224 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 198 Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 224 Operation Instructions Disc Mode For CD lll Sales Code RER AM FM CD DVD R
8. Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for 3 seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for 3 seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 225 TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for 5 seconds when ignition is off Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 of this manual Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to Satellite Radio in this section Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VE
9. 341 Engine Block Heater siss spedit ae braunsi as 248 Engine Fails to Start cicais ronireenspiia 246 Manual Transmission 245 REMOTES user d GREEN a ea e sc eee 25 Steering POWER 44 4 seen bade 3x Liber we eee x 277 363 Tilt Column ikea back octane baw xA 127 Wheel Lock uae ue e RO CA ee 17 Wheel Tilt 6 050 bru eho bd eR ech ed 127 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls uz done be ota ot BS ae ae ES 233 sto cri CC 152 Storage Bin ciaccera etsa pea Ee 152 Storage Vehicle us iru bunte i Deed s 240 SUD ROO ix 33 3 514 x SS P be Tue 144 Sun Visor Extension llli 86 Sunroof Maintenance llle 147 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 49 System Navigation llle 225 System Remote Starting llle 25 Tachometer 2 22 e RR eR nant 174 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 168 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 70 Tie Down Hooks Cargo 2 0 eee eee 153 Tilt Steering Column 000005 127 Tip Statt eee ee eva a cee eee eee ea 246 Tire and Loading Information Placard 283 Tire Identification Number TIN 282 Tire Markings 22232223 92 9 xe 279 Tire Safety Information 040 279 Tires id eg 5 4e se ieee 4 eor oes ES as dos 78 287 412 Air Pressure cooks sik WARE der ha odo 288 Alignment and Balance 293 CHAINS D ET 294 en INDEX 431 General Information
10. Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the UConnect system while dial ing via the cell phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The UConnect system will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the UConnect system to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute Off When you mute the UConnect system you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the UConnect system e Press the Voice Recognition button e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the UConnect system e Press the Voice Recognition button e Following the beep say Mute off Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The UConnect system allows on going calls to be transferred from your c
11. 350 lbs 159 kg Automatic square meters E STARTING AND OPERATING 321 NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to the Tire Safety Information section in this manual 4 0L 4x2 7 150 Ibs 3 243 kg 32 Sq Ft 2 97 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 200 Ibs 91 kg Automatic square meters 4 0L 4x4 7 400 lbs 3 356 kg 32 Sq Ft 2 97 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 200 Ibs 91 kg Automatic Square meters 4 0L 4x2 9 850 Ibs 4 468 kg 64 Sq Ft 5 94 3 500 Ibs 1 588 kg 350 Ibs 159 kg Automatic w square meters Cooler 4 0L 4x4 10 100 Ibs 4 581 kg 64 Sq Ft 5 94 3 500 Ibs 1 588 kg 350 Ibs 159 kg Automatic w square meters Cooler Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds 322 STARTING AND OPERATING ME When Towing Trailers with Gross Trailer Weight GTW between 3 500 Lbs 1 588 kg and 5 000 Lbs 2 268 kg The following chart provides maximum trailer weight ratings towable for the following engine transmission combinations ONLY if using a weight distributing hitch Engine Model GCWR Gross Com Frontal Area Max GTW Tongue Wt Transmission bined Wt Rating Gross Trailer Wt See Note 3 7L 4x2 9 850 Ibs 4 468 kg 64 Sq Ft 5 94 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg 500 lbs 227 kg Automatic w square meters
12. Charging 2 tence debe Rhe ra e Res 341 Emergency Starting 000000 341 Gas Caution llle eee 341 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 24 Belts Drive i ies GER AGGER RE E AG 358 Belts Seat i dudas Rm RE SP ER 40 Body Mechanism Lubrication 364 B Pillar Location 00 0000 e ee eee 283 Brake Assist System 66 64450404 e ba ees 132 Brake Control System Electronic 131 Brake Fluid p ris ooo ERR 396 Brake Parking i sak sone ee dus e eade qun eoa 272 Brake System cesses c erede Co etre s 372 Anti Lock ABS 0 0 askana eee 131 274 FOSES iuge lS Ge ead Bane Gh RE Ale Ue 372 Master Cylinder iussi ke ak eas 373 Parking 20 cp hisise e Remi ke ts 272 Warning Light isses 171 173 Brake Transmission Interlock 254 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 76 Bulb Replacement 00000050 389 Bulbs Light lt 24 eso RR RR REG 389 Calibration Compass isses 183 190 Capacities Fluid 2 6 cess er Re babs 394 Caps Filler Fuel geese te rnae eae ae Gan ee 310 Power Steering 2d cines ew 4 ees 363 Car Washes 4 aus testa ae rg OR ORC 378 Carbon Monoxide Warning 76 309 Cargo Area Features tasases esas 153 Cargo Compartment 0000000 153 HO 418 INDEX aa Ao rH A 158 Cargo Light ses aussi erae 24 eel 2S 153 Cargo Load PloOE 4 4 cce
13. Cooler 3 7L 4x4 10 100 Ibs 4 581 kg 64 Sq Ft 5 94 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg 500 lbs 227 kg Automatic square meters w Cooler 4 0L 4x2 9 850 Ibs 4 468 kg 64 Sq Ft 5 94 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg 500 lbs 227 kg Automatic w square meters Cooler 4 0L 4x4 10 100 Ibs 4 581 kg 64 Sq Ft 5 94 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg 500 lbs 227 kg Automatic w square meters Cooler Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to the Tire Safety Information section in this manual Trailer and Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch STARTING AND OPERATING 323 es HEIGHT 81546c40 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any
14. Maintaining Your Airbag System NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate Airbag Warning Light D Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail You will want to have the airbag system ready to inflate when you need it You could be injured if the airbag system is not for your protection in an impact The airbag system is there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel designed to be maintenance free If any of the following hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper or vehicle body structufe P occurs have an authorized dealer service the system Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced airbag system promptly The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for e Does not come on during the 6 to 8 seconds after the any advanced airbag system service If your seat including your trim TET og cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including removal ignition switch is first turned on or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accessories e Remains on after the 6 to 8 second interval may be used If it is necessary to modi
15. When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in phone book when vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the UConnect phone book UConnect phone book nametag recognition rate is optimized for the person who stored the name in the phone book You can say O letter O for 0 zero 800 must be spoken eight zero zero es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 e Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported e Ina convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under low to medium blower setting low to medium vehicle speed low road noise smooth road surface fully closed windows and dry weather condition operation from driver seat e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the UConnect system e Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Bluetooth Communication Link Cellular phones have been found to lose connecti
16. especially with a loaded vehicle Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on method of installation operating speed and conditions for usage Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufacturer if different than the speed recom mended by the manufacturer en STARTING AND OPERATING 295 These cautions apply to all chain traction devices includ ing link and cable radial chains Tire chain use is permitted only on the rear tires NOTE The use of class S chains is permitted with P235 65R17 tires CAUTION Do not use tire chains on vehicles equipped with tires other than P235 65R17 tires There may not be adequate clearance for the chains and you are risking structural or body damage to your vehicle TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering handling and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and develop irregular wear patterns These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On Off Road type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to main tain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your type of driving
17. the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before driving LIGHTS Interior Lights The overhead light comes on when a door is opened It may also be turned on by rotating the control for the dimmer switch on the multi function control lever fully upward The overhead light will automatically turn off in about 20 minutes if a door is left open or the dimmer control is left in the dome light position Turn the ignition switch ON to restore the overhead light operation Daytime Brightness Feature Certain instrument panel components odometer radio display can be illuminated at full brightness during the daytime This can be helpful when driving with your headlights on during the daytime such as in a parade or a funeral procession To activate this feature rotate the left stalk one detent lower than the dome light es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 Multi Function Control Lever Parking Lights Instrument Panel Lights and The multi function control lever controls the operation of Headlights the parking lights headlights headlight beam selection Turn the end of the multi function control lever to the passing light fog lights instrument panel light dimming first detent for parking lights and instrument panel and turn signals lights Turn to the second detent for headlight operation E gu Multi Function Control Lever Headlight Switch 124 UNDERS
18. 292 Reporting Safety Defects 0050 409 Restraint Head eee 116 Restraints Child 402 0264 2220004948 RPGe S 66 Restraints Occupant ess ssas 2c eee eee 39 Roll Over Warning 2 4 s04 249 40 e new s 4 Roof Type Cartier esireast adie epe dre tis 160 Rotation Tires i sik 48 de donk ba pos 295 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 77 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 78 Safety Defects Reporting 409 Safety Information Tire 00 279 Safety Tips ia ceed ce pe aen ry eR erga hs 76 Satellite Radio llle 226227 Satellite Radio Antenna 0005 228 Schedule Maintenance lle 398 Seat Belt Maintenance llle 77 Seat Belt Reminder lesen 46 Seat Belts iue a REGEM RN es 40 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 44 And Pregnant Women 04 4 48 Child Restrait 422 229 puer 66 73 Extender 5 eee dk eS a ae X 48 Front Seat iinigogewuzaeudpSoe40 94 5d Y wx ES 40 Inspection s cac aci doses deg RR RC IRURE RR 77 Maintenance 0 0 0000 eee ene 77 381 Pretensioners llle 46 Reminder e eaea aeea a ede a e P ns 169 en INDEX 429 Shoulder Belt Anchorage 44 Seals 24 Da oe awa ea AE ee ae Ch UE Ea 113 Adjustment 4 ae eke e rep ea ae E bm 113 Cleaning cessisse ek ik eR RE Ed s E 379 Head Restraints llle 116 Heated sed ea Sea
19. 382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse J1 40 Amp Power Folding Seat J9 40 Amp PZEV Motor Flex Green Green Fuel J2 30 Amp Transfer Case Pwr J10 30 Amp Hdlp Wash Relay Pink Liftgate Module Pink Manual Tuning Valve J3 40 Amp Rear Door Module J11 30 Amp Sway Bar Green RR DOOR NODE Pink THATCHAM Lock J4 25 Amp Driver Door Node Unlock Power Slid Natural ing Door Module J5 25 Amp Passenger Door Node J13 60 Amp Ignition Off Draw Natural Yellow IOD Main J6 40 Amp Anti Lock Brake Sys J14 40 Amp EBL Rear Window Green tem ABS Pump ESP Green Defogger J7 30 Amp Anti Lock Brake Sys J15 30 Amp Rear Blower Pink tem ABS Valve ESP Pink J8 40 Amp Power Memory Seat J17 40 Amp Starter Solenoid Green If Equipped Green es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse J18 20 Amp Powertrain Control M3 20 Amp Frt Rear Axle Lockers Yellow Module PCM Trans Yellow Range M4 10 Amp Trailer Tow J19 60 Amp Radiator Fan Red Yellow M5 25 Amp Inverter J20 30 Amp Front Wiper LO HI Natural Pink M6 20Amp Power Outlet 1 Rain J21 20 Amp Front Rear Washer Yellow Sensor Yellow M7 20 Amp Power Outlet 2 J22 25 Amp Sunroof Module Yellow BATT ACC SELECT
20. Automatic Transmission Start the engine with the selector lever in the N Neutral or P Park position Apply the brake before shifting to any driving range Normal Starting Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal Turn the key to the START position and release when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds turn the key to the OFF position wait 5 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure 246 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Tip Start Feature Automatic Transmission Only Extreme Cold Weather below 20 F or 29 C Do not press the accelerator Turn the ignition key briefly To insure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an to START position and release it The starter motor will externally powered electric engine block heater available continue to run but will automatically disengage itself from your dealer is recommended when the engine is running If Engine Fails to Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the engine This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 80e5
21. EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC displays the following messages Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime Left Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Right Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime RKE Battery Low with a single chime Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle Not in Park e Left Right Front Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph Left Right Rear Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph Door s Ajar with a single chime if vehicle is in motion Liftgate Ajar with a single chime Left Front Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System in Section 5 of this manual Left Rear Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System in Section 5 of this manual ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 187 Right Front Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System in Section 5 of this manual Right Rear Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System in Section 5 of this manual Check TPM System with a single chime Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System in Section 5 of this manual Check Gascap refer to A
22. SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode No function TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will display for 5 seconds RW FF Auxiliary Mode No function SET Button Auxiliary Mode No function Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped For the radio refer to Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped in section 3 of this manual for detailed operating instructions 212 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS ME For UConnect Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped refer to Hands Free Communication UCon nect in section 3 of this manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 of this manual Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to Satellite Radio in this section Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide Dolby Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection technol ogy that is protected by U S patents and other intellec tual property
23. The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved un der specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL Tire Extra Load XL Extra Load or Reinforced Tire Light Load Light Load Tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 282 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Tire Identification Number TIN located on the white sidewall side of the tire Look for the The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted however the date code may only be on one side Tires with on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on the outboard side white sidewalls will have the full TIN including date code then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the ti
24. To Arm TheSystem llle 18 To Disarm The System 00 19 B Wiuminated Entty iisdem mni 19 Bl Remote Keyless Entry 0040 20 To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate 20 To Lock The Doors And Liftgate 21 Using The Panic Alarm 0 23 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME 10 Programming Additional Transmitters 24 Battery Replacement 06 24 General Information lessen 25 ll Remote Starting System If Equipped 25 la Door Locks 2 0 ccc eee 27 Manual Door Locks 0000004 28 Power Door Locks 0 000000 eee 29 Automatic Door Locks llle 29 Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit 30 Child Protection Door Lock System Rear D601 2i 2 e RU DR RES bees heed qe 32 la Windows 0 33 Power Windows 0000 e eee eee 33 Wind B ffeting RR ae Rae 37 Ligate fico ty cy ey PP en hee a es 38 ll Occupant Restraints 6 456604 Rn 39 Lap Shoulder Belts 0 0 40 Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 41 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 44 Automatic Locking Mode If Equipped 45 Energy Management Feature 45 Seat Belt Pretensioners 46 Enhanced Seat Belt Us
25. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Rear Jacking Location 5 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire 8 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability and remove the jack and wheel blocks ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 341 9 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage Alternate nuts until each nut has been tightened twice Correct wheel nut tightness is 130 N m 95 ft Ibs If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 10 Lower the jack to it s fully closed position WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided 11 Secure the tire jack and tools in their proper loca tions JUMP STARTING WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes skin or cloth ing Don t lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the contami nated area imm
26. Under normal conditions the use of premium gasoline will not provide a benefit over high quality regular gasolines and in some circumstances may result in poorer performance REGOMMENDED OCTANE RATING IReMy2 METHOD 4 0L Engine If Equipped The 4 0L engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfac tory fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded gasoline hav ing an octane range of 87 to 89 The manu facturer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance The use of premium gasoline is not recommended Under normal conditions the use of premium gasoline will not provide a benefit over high quality regular and mid grade gasolines and in some circumstances may result in poorer performance REGOMMENDED OCTANE RATING IReMy2 METHOD Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required es STARTING AND OPERATING 307 Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before consid ering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturer s world wide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC to define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for you
27. You can use your UConnect system to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as paging ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 service or automated customer service Some services require immediate response selection in some instances that may be too quick for use of UConnect system When calling a number with your UConnect system that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can push the Voice Recognition button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your pin number followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the Voice Recognition button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used to navigate through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored UConnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voicemail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the Voice Recognition button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The UConnect will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phone book entry as tones over the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone net
28. again If you still cannot make the child restraint secure try a different seating position 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seat back they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Children Too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seat back should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position e f the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Your vehicle s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of t
29. or longer in rare cases The garage door may open amp close while you train 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE e Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming sec tion e After training a HomeLink channel if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the ga rage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the garage door opener may have rolling code If so proceed to the heading Programming A Rolling Code System 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light If the indicator light stays on constantly programming is complete and the garage door or device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with program ming for Rolling Code 5 PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the learn or training button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor it is NOT the button normally used to open amp close the door UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 7 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for 2 sec onds each time If the device is plugged in
30. process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s instruc tions for cleaning e It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the airbags have deployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you WARNING Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the airbags seat belt pretensioner and seat belt retractor assem bly replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Also have the Occupant Classification Sys tem serviced as well Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact that causes airbag deployment with the vehicle stopped and the vehicle communication network intact and the power intact the Enhanced Accident Response System performs the following func tions e Cuts off fuel to the engine e Flashes hazard lights e Turns on the interior lamps which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed e Unlocks the doors automatically ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
31. roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna if equipped Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger lug gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 229 e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for 8 seconds before continuing to the next T
32. sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors 302 STARTING AND OPERATING ME e 3 Trigger Modules mounted in three of the four wheel wells e Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly if equipped has a tire pressure monitoring sensor The full size spare
33. you could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Adjust the column only while the vehicle is stopped Be sure it is locked before driving 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged this device takes over the accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h Electronic Speed Control Operation The speed control lever is located on the right side of the steering wheel 818f2005 To Activate Push the ON OFF button The CRUISE indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system OFF push the ON OFF button a second time The CRUISE indicator will turn off The system should be turned OFF when not in use WARNING Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it Speed Control Lever es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 To Set At A Desired Speed When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press down on the lever and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pulling the speed control lever towards you CANCEL
34. 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration SEATS Front Manual Seat Adjustment Move the seat forward or rearward using the adjustment bar Lift up on the bar located on the front of the seat near the floor Position the seat and be sure the latch engages fully Manual Seat Adjustment Using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked Front Seat Adjustment Recline To adjust the seatback lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat lean back and release the lever at the desired position To return the seatback lift the Seatback Release Lever lever lean forward and release the lever es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the seat belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recl
35. AM sound is based on wave amplitude so AM reception can be disrupted by such things as lightning power lines and neon signs FM Reception Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia tions interference that consists of amplitude variations can be filtered out leaving the reception relatively clear which is the major feature of FM radio NOTE The radio steering wheel radio controls if equipped and 6 disc CD DVD changer if equipped will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned off Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature SALES CODE REQ AM FM STEREO RADIO AND 6 DISC CD DVD CHANGER MP3 WMA AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate C E LOAD 6 DISC MP3 WMA PUSH ON PUSH AUDIO SELECT VOLUME TUNE SCROLL U AUX 8189f8f9 REQ Radio 198 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Press the ON VOL control to turn the radio ON Press the ON VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the volume control to the right increases the volume and to the left decrease
36. B which monitors the emissions and engine control system If the vehicle is ready for emissions testing the light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on as a bulb check until the engine is started If the vehicle is not ready for emissions testing the light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on for 15 seconds then blink for 10 seconds and remain on until the vehicle is started If the bulb does not come on during starting have the condi tion investigated promptly If this light comes on and remains on while driving it suggests a potential engine control problem and the need for system service Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your dealer for service as soon as possible ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 179 CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could affect fuel economy and driveability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required 28 Cruise Indicator Light If Equipped This indicator lights when the electronic speed control system is turned on 29 Odometer Trip Odometer Reset Button Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of the two trip odometer settings When the trip odometer is displayed press once for Trip A and press again for Trip B If the instrument clust
37. Battery 44 362 Maintenance Procedures llle 354 Maintenance Schedule ss 398 Maintenance Sunroof llle 147 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 178 351 Manual Service llle 410 Manual Transmission 249 375 Fluid Level Check oeseri sernegut 00005 375 Lubricant Selection 00 375 396 Shift Speeds cessa see des made Y ER ER 251 Master Cylinder Brakes 04 373 Mini Trip Computer 000 180 188 MITOS 23 Seon dee IE ieee a ane HESS SES 83 Automatic Dimming less 84 Electric Powered llle 85 Outside x 65 ainda dun DE Re se dE ERO RU RO EUR 84 REATVICW o xx 808 eek a aod Irc d o e heb v ae 83 HO 420 INDEX aaa Vanity ca Seda ice oe eh RO hw RO o done e ae 86 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 8 Monitor Tire Pressure System 296 Mopar Parts 222604 n em eR RR Rege 353 409 Multi Function Control Lever 123 Navigation Radio llle 225 Navigation System eu su iiaeie sa ee ee eee eee 225 New Vehicle Break In Period 76 Occupant Restraints 0 0 0 000 39 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 306 Odometer ATID scs 63 dpi Rue REGS RA eae Aur 0d 179 Off Pavement Driving Off Road 268 Off Road Driving Off Pavement 268 Oil Engine 239m m esee peta dd 354 395 Capacity
38. Control 8191de23 Panel INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Ss The mode control allows you to choose from several pat terns of air distribution You can select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols or a blend of two of these modes The closer the control is to a particular mode the more air distribu tion you receive from that mode gt 3 Airis directed through the four outlets in the instru ment panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct air flow Bi Level o J Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE There is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort The warmer air goes to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets and side window demist outlets with a small amount through the defrost outlet Mix Ge Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 237 Defrost W Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum fan and temperature Hot settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compresso
39. Doors On Exit feature is en abled 2 The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 3 The transmission is in N Neutral or P Park 4 The driver door is opened ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 5 The doors were not previously unlocked 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled as follows For vehicles equipped with a Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual for details For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK 4 times ending up in the LOCK position 3 Depress the power door unlock switch to unlock the 2 doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Usethe Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors WARNING Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lock and rotate to the lock or unlock position
40. Equipped With UCon nect message will display on the radio screen ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 215 TIME Button Press the TIME button and the time of day will display In AM or FM mode pressing the TIME button will switch between the time and frequency displays Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE control knob Press the TUNE control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait 5 seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control
41. Instrument Cluster Description sie piers saa eae PR E 168 Warning Roll Over 0 0 6 6 tgau darska aset 4 Warnings and Cautions cessie is essi e ees 7 en INDEX 433 Warranty Information 409 Washer Adding Fluid 000 159 Washers Windshield 365 Waxing and Polishing 04 378 Wheel Alignment and Balance 293 Wheel and Wheel Trim 0005 379 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 379 Wheel Mounting 0 0 340 Wind Buffeting llle 37 146 Window Fogging sees 239 Windows POWER u eate tenting B e RR ad dus Bae MS GS 33 Windshield Defroster 0 0 00 00 eee nee 78 Windshield Washers less 125 365 Fluid oc sree bate codes RR Re 0 Hebe A 365 Windshield Wiper Blades 365 Windshield Wipers anaa anaana 125 Wiper Rear uk oue Re RE a dda aes 157 Wrecker Towing 2l ke RERRRRRE IR 343 YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure 379
42. Natural M8 20 Amp Front Heated Seat M1 15 Amp Center High Mounted Yellow Blue Stop Light CHMSL M9 20 Amp Rear Heated Seat If Brake Switch Yellow Equipped M2 20 Amp Trailer Lighting Yellow 384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M MW SENSR Under hood Lamp UH LMP Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse M10 20 Amp Ignition Off Draw M12 30 Amp Amplifier AMP Yellow Vehicle Entertainment Green System IOD VES M13 20 Amp Ignition Off Draw Satellite Digital Audio Yellow Cabin Compartment Receiver SDARS Node IOD CCN DVD Hands Free Wireless Control Module HFM RA Module WCM SI DIO Antenna ANT REN Clock Module Universal Garage CLK MOD Multi Door Opener Function Control UGDO Vanity Switch MULTIFCTN Lamp VANITY LP SW M11 10 Amp Ignition Off Draw M14 20 Amp Trailer Tow Export Red IOD HVAC ATC Yellow Only ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385 Switch MULTIFTCN SW Tire Pressure Monitor TPM Glow Plug Module GLW PLG MOD Export Diesel Only Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse M15 20 Amp COL MOD IR SNS M16 10 Amp Occupant Restraint Yellow Heater Ventilation Red Controller Occupant Air Conditioning Classification Module Automatic Tempera ORC OCM ture Contro
43. Pressing the Lock button on the key fob while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the Unlock button to deactivate the Security Alarm Using the Panic Alarm NOTE The Panic and Security alarms are quite different Please take a moment to activate the Panic and the Security modes to hear the differences in the horn In case one should go off in the future you will need to know which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it To turn the panic alarm feature ON or OFF press and hold the Panic button on the key fob for at least one second and release When the panic alarm is on the headlights and parking lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the illuminated entry system will turn on The panic alarm will stay on for 3 minutes unless you turn it off by pressing the Panic button a second time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph 8 km h or greater 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M During the Panic Mode the door locks and remote keyless entry systems will function normally Panic mode will not disarm the security system on vehicles so equipped Programming Additional Transmitters Refer to SENTRY KEY Customer Key Programming in this section NOTE If you do not have a programmed transmitter key fob contact your dealer for details Battery Replaceme
44. ROA 4 Inverter Power sss o RR 149 Jack Location u 3 eroe ce RT IRR 336 Jack Operation 00 000 336 339 Jacking Instructions 000004 339 Key Programming 00 000s 16 Key Replacement ci oes es che eae ees 15 Key Sentry Immobilizer llle 14 Key In Reminder sss dare ERR E 14 Keyless Entry System llle sess 20 Keys 424 INDEX M Lane Change and Turn Signals 171 Lap Shoulder Belts 0 000000 40 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren 3 4 2 4 46s4 405 4 heed eos s bender 70 71 Lead Free Gasoline 000000005 306 Teak Elitd oarra saran E Gate we ale a ae 78 Life Of Tires 4 uo RR RR RR 292 Liftgate s La medo emen Pur wate EE npe e eds 38 Lights 24 ces sawed e RE e RE 78 122 AITbag sia Gok eges tigen due cs ener ak 63 174 Alarm sek ce peda shaneeds Ped EFE 77 Anti Lock Warning 0 00004 173 Back Upe dme i oP cine ti me epe id wed 392 Brake Assist Warning 0005 137 Brake Warning ses Ghat eden eee ae ES 171 Bulb Replacement lt oses aneti te mresa apia s 389 Caffo seomra artna a ee eike ed 153 Center Mounted Stop lille 393 Gun serere Ix m 179 Daytime Running 000000 125 Dimmer Switch Headlight 124 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 66 ee eee 135 170 ROG ouis eee ibs Bente dai ang wie fat 124 174 391 Hazard Warning Fla
45. Sit back and adjust the seat 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap Latch Plate 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch WARNING plate into the buckle until you hear a click A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the Latch Plate To Buckle force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VE
46. The Airbag Warning Light is turned on whenever there is a fault that can affect the operation of the airbag system If there is a fault present in the OCS both the PAD Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light are illuminated to show that the passenger airbag is turned off until the fault is cleared If an object is lodged under the seat and interferes with operation of the weight sensors a fault will occur which turns on both the PAD Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light Once the lodged object is removed the fault will be automatically cleared after a short period of time e The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags Different airbag inflation rates are possible based on collision severity and occupant size The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag T
47. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 e After you enter the name the UConnect system will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work mobile pager or all Say the designation you wish to delete e Note that only the phone book entry in the current language is deleted Delete All Entries in the UConnect Phonebook e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All e The UConnect system will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook e After confirmation the phone book entries will be deleted e Note that only the phone book in the current language is deleted List All Names in the UConnect Phonebook e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names EC e The UConnect system will play the names of all the phone book entries To call one of the names in the list press the Voice Recognition button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point e The UConnect system will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the UConnect system if the featu
48. Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is fluid temperature and it should be avoided when due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This possible Damage to the power steering pump may noise should be considered normal and it does not in any occur way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings SERVICE MAXIMUM DESCRIPTION LOAD MAXIMUM SIZE DESIGNATION PRESSURE TREADWEAR U S DOT TRACTION SAFETY Ds AND STANDARDS a TEMPERATURE CODE GRADES TIN 811b44e8 NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation Ex ample P215 65R15 95H STARTING AND OPERATING 279 European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H e LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LI Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for
49. Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability en STARTING AND OPERATING 293 WARNING CAUTION e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that Replacing original tires with tires of a different size specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics result ing in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components Alignment and Balance You could lose control and have an accident resulting Poor suspension alignment may result in 5 may result in false speedometer and odometer readings in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle e Fast tire wear Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity e Uneven tire wear such as feathering and one sided other than what was originally equipped on your wear vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load inde
50. a separator and a 3 character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 223 rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Specifi cation Sampling Fre quency kHz Bit Rate kbps MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the r
51. all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353 Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD system is ready or not ready if the MIL symbol is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to in sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non Mopar parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your dealer has the qualified service personnel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attemp
52. allow to scroll through tracks faster in CD MP3 MWA modes SCAN Button CD MODE Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button CD MODE Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD MODE Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button CD MODE Switches the Radio to the Radio mode 208 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS ME Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files The radio can play MP3 WMA files however acceptable MP3 WMA file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 WMA files pay attention to the following restrictions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 WMA DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD RW and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory leve
53. and set defaults according to customer preference Menu Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language effective only if language supported by disc If customer wishes to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the 4 digit country code using the TUNE control knob to scroll up and down to select the and then push to select Audio Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose a default audio language effective only if language supported by 204 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se disc If customer wishes to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the country code using the TUNE control knob to scroll up and down to select the and then push to select Subtitle Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose a default subtitle language effective only if language supported by disc If customer wishes to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the country code using the TUNE control knob to scroll up and down to select the and then push to select Subtitles If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose between subtitle OFF or ON Audio DRC If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to limit maximum audio dynamic range The default is set to High and under this se
54. and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the auto up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way pull the window switch up to the first detent and release when you want the window to stop For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable For details refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features under Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE e If the window runs into any obstacle during auto closure it will reverse direction and then stop Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window e Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close window manually WARNING There is no
55. anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing Reset It may be necessary at some point in time to reactivate the auto up feature To do so perform the following proce dure 1 Pull the window switch up to close window com pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed 2 Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver s door below the power window switches allows you to disable the window control on the other doors To disable the window controls on the other doors press the window lockout button To enable the window controls press the window lockout button again es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 D Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the PE ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting Window Lockout Switch 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YO
56. are met Store the heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally Stow all loose items securely before driving Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully re view this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR 316 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Gross Trailer Weight GTW The gross trailer weight GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of a
57. brake is firmly set when parked and indicates only that the parking brake is applied You must the gear selector lever is in the P Park position be sure the parking brake is fully applied before leaving automatic transmission or R Reverse or 1st gear the vehicle manual transmission When parking on a hill you should apply the parking brake before placing the gear selector lever in P Park otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the selector out of P Park Parking Brake 274 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING e Always apply the parking brake fully when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave an automatic transmission in P Park or a manual transmis sion in R Reverse or 1st gear Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dan gerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake problems due to excessive heating of the rear brakes When parking on a hill turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade The parking brake should always
58. check water depth before entering as a precaution and check all fluids afterward Driving through water may cause damage that may not be covered by the new vehicle limited warranty Driving through water more than a few inches deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent dam age to your vehicle If you must drive through water try to determine the depth and the bottom condition and location of any obstacles prior to entering Proceed with caution and maintain a steady controlled speed less than 5 mph 8 km h in deep water to minimize wave effects Flowing Water If the water is swift flowing and rising as in storm run off avoid crossing until the water level recedes and or the flow rate is reduced If you must cross flowing water avoid depths in excess of 9 inches The flowing water can erode the streambed causing your vehicle to sink into deeper water Determine exit point s that are downstream of your entry point to allow for drifting Standing Water Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 inches and reduce speed appropriately to minimize wave ef fects Maximum speed in 20 inches of water is less than 5 mph 8 km h Maintenance After driving through deep water inspect your vehicle fluids and lubricants engine transmission axle transfer case to assure they have not been contaminated Con taminated fluids and lubricants milky foamy in appear ance should be flushed changed as soon as p
59. com plete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by DaimlerChrysler Corporation and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor mance In addition to crash investigations initiated by DaimlerChrysler Corporation such investigations may be requested by customers insurance carriers govern ment officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insurance organizations In the event that an investigation is undertaken by DaimlerChrysler Corporation regardless of initiative the company or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the electronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases such as those maintained by the US govern ment and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver ve hicle or crash will be treated confidentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by DaimlerChr
60. croci e rip e Ear CAPRA ke ER SCA RD 265 Four Wheel Drive Operation 265 Four Way Hazard Flasher 334 Front Axle Differential 00 377 Field ard xe deer d Es ow wears 306 Filler Cap Gas Cap ccs cete erred 310 gl PL 361 Gaso litie 22 55 pe 6444 8 obtage ene GERE 306 Ga BO gt 5 sisse a rE meia d cic aes doe ain ea d 168 Materials Added esses 308 HO 422 INDEX ME Octane Rating ua pane rr 306 395 Requirements 4232 8 vad ea o en 394 Tank Capacity sucede e ehe tu ee 394 Fuel System Caution issus 308 311 312 FUSES iisskes emu p RARE Gora yx ES 381 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 137 Gas Cap Fuel Fillr Cap 310 312 351 Gas Gauge Fuel Gauge 00 168 Gasoline Fuel us cR RR Ee eria 306 Gasoline Reformulated sss 307 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 307 Gauges Coolant Temperature lt s rnense nataan ya 168 Fuel eneeier EE 168 Odometer aupen tarai n EE a R R ats 177 Speedometer 2k orien dike eg E psi 170 Tachometer ios said pee hee Soe 174 Gear Ranges 33 9 3 ew e s 251 255 260 General Information ls 17 113 305 Glass Cleaning cita 4282 e Ren 380 Gross Axle Weight Rating 313 316 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 313 315 GVWR zem REALE GG px ue EES 313 Hands Free Phone UConnect 87 Hazard Warning Flasher
61. define Occupant Classification Refer to Occupant Classification System in this section 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee This vehicle is equipped with window bags to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a win dow They are located above the side windows Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG 8192b898 Window Airbag Location NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open to allow airbag deployment WARNING Do not put anything on or around the front airbag covers or attempt to manually open them You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags are no longer functional These protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflating Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the window bag The area where the window bag is located should remain free from any obstructions Do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments bolts or screws for installation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason Do not cover or place items on the airbag covers These items may cause serious injury during inflation ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 The front airbags have a multi
62. disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front seating positions the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Press the release button to release the anchorage and then move it up or down to the position that serves you best Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you ll prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position Automatic Locking Mode If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode Anytime a child safety seat is installed in the rear center seating position Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible How To Use The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is
63. display will revert back to only displaying the odometer trip odometer mileage 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See Manual Door Locks 1 Use the manual door lock plunger to lock the doors from WARNING inside the vehicle If the plunger is down when the door e For personal security and safety in the event of an is closed the door will lock Therefore make sure the accident lock the vehicle doors when you drive as keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door well as when you park and leave the vehicle When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition lock and lock your vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe per sonal injuries and death Manual Lock Plunger en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 Power Door Locks locks will not operate This prevents you from acciden A door lock switch is on each front door panel Press this tally locking your keys in the vehicle Removing the key switch to lock or unlock the doors or closing the door will allow the locks to operate A chime will sound if the key is in the ignition switch and a door is open as a reminder to remove the key Power Door Lock Switch If you press the power door lock switch while the key is in the ignition and any front door is open the power Automatic Door Locks The doors will lock au
64. e Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible Avoid icy or slippery areas e Set the parking brake and place the gear selector in WIBLOCK 7 oari hed PARK automatic transmission or REVERSE manual transmission e Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 339 Jacking Instructions 1 Remove spare tire 2 Loosen but do not remove the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 3 Remove jack and tools from mounting bracket As semble the tools by connecting the driver to the exten sion and then to the lug wrench 4 Locate the jack as shown For the front tires place it in the notch on the body weld seam behind wheel to be changed For the rear tires place it under the axle by the wheel to be changed Position the jack handle on the jack Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged Front Jacking Location 340 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable and cause an accident It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 6 Remove the lug nuts and wheel 7 Position the spare wheel tire on the vehicle and install 803544 lug nuts with cone shaped end toward wheel Lightly tighten the nuts
65. ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 239 Operating Tips Window Fogging Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside the vehicle is high This often occurs in mild or cool temperatures when it s rainy or humid In most cases turning on the air conditioning pressing the snowflake button will clear the fog Adjust the temperature control air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to direct air onto the windshield Adjust the temperature control and blower speed to maintain comfort Higher blower speeds will reduce fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the defrost mode Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a non filming cleaning solution vinegar and water works very well will help prevent contaminates cigarette smoke perfumes etc from sticking to the windows Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging Summer Operation Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant during summer to provide proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point of the coolant for protection against overheating A 50 concentration is recommended Refer to Fluids and Genuine Parts in Section 7 for the proper coolant type When using the air conditioner in extremely heavy traffic in hot weather especially when towing a trailer addi tional engine cooling may be required If
66. flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights You can signal a lane change by moving the lever partially up or down without moving beyond the detent If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective NOTE A tone will chime if the turn signals are left on for more than 1 mile 2 km Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The headlights come on at a low intensity level after the vehicle has been driven approximately 3 feet 1 meter They will turn off when the vehicle is turned off or when the headlights are switched on WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS CAUTION In cold weather always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the park position before turning off the engine If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Move the lever to the DELAY position then select the delay interval by turning the end of the lever The delay can be regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles
67. for any of the following police taxi fleet off road or fre 60 000 100 000 60 quent trailer towing en MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 403 Perform Maintenance Every Where time and mileage are listed follow the interval that occurs first Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months Flush and replace the engine coolant 102 000 170 000 60 Replace the spark plugs 4 0L Only 102 000 170 000 102 Replace the timing belt 4 0L Only 102 000 170 000 102 Change the automatic transmission fluid amp filter 120 000 200 000 120 Replace accessory drive belt s 3 7L and 4 0L 120 000 200 000 120 WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS H Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your Bi Reporting Safety Defects 65 409 Vehicle iua m REESE REX ex EE 406 TCA uo e e e cence cose 410 Prepare For The Appointment 1 406 Bl Publication Order Forms 00 410 Prepare A Listened ee eere e AUS 406 ll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Be Reasonable With Requests 406 Qualit
68. for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air cleaner removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury 362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required WARNING Battery posts terminals and related accessories con tain lead and lead compounds Always wash hands after handling the battery CAUTION It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked positive and negative and identified on the battery case Also if a fast charger is used while battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363 WARNING Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufactur
69. found in the Maintenance Schedules Section of this manual More frequent rotation is permis sible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per formed 296 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE The Premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS IF automatically locate the pressure values displayed inthe EQUIPPED correct vehicle position following a tire rotation e The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn The suggested rotation method is the forward cross the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle shown in the following diagram recommended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that E A uu N when the outside temperature decreases the tire pres sure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 km E E after a 3 hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to the Tires General Information in this section for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire FRONT 8031e864 pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is norma
70. in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The vehicle identification number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle through the wind shield This number also appears on the Automobile Vehicle Identification Number Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on NOTE It is illegal to remove the VIN your vehicle the vehicle registration and the title 8 INTRODUCTION ME VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS E A Word About Your Keys 0 12 Ignition Key Removal lesse 12 Key In Ignition Reminder 14 W Sentry Key ius esae RE EORR Rx 14 Replacement Keys ena pannat ea pih h n iaa 15 Customer Key Programming 16 General Information 0 17 H Steering Wheel Lock If Equipped 17 To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel 17 To Release The Steering Wheel Lock 18 ll Security Alarm System If Equipped 18
71. in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your dealer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained techni cians and genuine Mopar parts and is interested in your satisfaction ROLLOVER WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off road applications Driven in an unsafe manner all vehicles can be caused to go out of control Because of the higher center of gravity if this vehicle is out of control it may rollover when some other vehicles may not Do not attempt sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident rollover of the vehicle and severe or fatal injury Drive carefully AQ WARNING HIGHER ROLLOVER RISK Avoid Abrupt Maneuvers and Excessive Speed Always Buckle Up See Owner s Manual For Further Information 80bfe0f0 Rollover Warning Label Failure to use driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause o
72. is recommended for children who weigh up Improper installation can lead to failure of an to about 20 Ibs 9 kg Convertible child seats often infant or child restraint It could come loose in a have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing collision The child could be badly injured or direction than infant carriers do so they can be used killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 actly when installing an infant or child restraint Ibs 9 kg but are less than one year old Both types of A rearward facing infant restraint should only be child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap used in a rear seat A rearward facing infant shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage restraint in the front seat may be struck by a system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage deploying passenger airbag which may cause se System in this section vere or fatal injury to the infant 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child restraint Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards The manufacturer also recommends that you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you will use it before you buy it The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height
73. key to the LOCK position 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds then restart the en gine 5 Move the shift lever to the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation If the problem persists P Park R Reverse and N Neutral will continue to operate Only Second gear range will operate in the D Drive shifter position Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automati cally at a calibrated speed at light throttle It engages at higher speeds under heavier acceleration This may re sult in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in high gear When the vehicle speed drops below a calibrated speed or during acceleration the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages The feature is operational in Overdrive and in Drive NOTE The torque converter clutch will not engage until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm usually after 1 3 miles 1 6 4 8 km of driving Because the engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold This is normal NOTE If the vehicle has not been driven in several days the first few seconds
74. limit will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings V The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will d illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pres sures the system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off The 300 STARTING AND OPERATING ME vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Check TPMS Warning When a system fault is detected the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of a
75. lisse 147 Electronic Brake Control System 131 Anti Lock Brake System llus 131 Brake Assist System 420 INDEX aaa Electronic Roll Mitigation 133 Electronic Stability Program 134 Traction Control System lille 132 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 133 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 128 Electronic Stability Program ESP 134 170 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 184 Emergency In Case of Hazard Warning Flasher 334 Jacking wx acsee cse Ga Che d eer 336 Overheating 4x Sd wo Rd s e e eda ue 335 TOWING ues utis esce det Y Pas ya denn 343 Emission Control System Maintenance 351 398 Engine Air Cleanet 520 xua Make ein Bs ed eae OES 361 Block Heatef 22 4666 kr dn Rm 248 Break In Recommendations 76 Compartment tasien ape 348 349 Compartment Identification 348 349 Coolant Antifreeze 1 22 00 0 0 eee 395 Exhaust Gas Caution 000 76 309 bails to Start roas sac bo debra ES be ald avers 246 Flooded Starting 00504 246 Fuel Requirements 0 306 394 Jump Starting os espana et mme nes 341 MEE vase hebseuee aide eee 354 394 395 Oil Disposal sess edsbensenedeeee ORE 357 Oil Filter 2222 34 ERE TPRERRSRG S4 GR SES 357 Oil Selection esa civ ave ea ese aes RU ERAN 394 Overheating ausser qe aetas
76. moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 km after a 3 hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres sure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low 290 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds main
77. name phone book accessible only in that language Phonebook Download UConnect allows the user to download entries from their phone via Bluetooth To use this feature press the Phone button and say Phonebook Download Sys tem prompts Ready to accept vcard entry via Blue tooth The system is now ready to accept phonebook entries from your phone using the Bluetooth Object Exchange Profile OBEX Please see your phone owners manual for specific instructions on how to send these entries from your phone NOTE e Phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX trans fers of phonebook entries to use this feature e Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they are already connected to any system via Bluetooth and you may see a message on the phone display that the Bluetooth link is busy In this case the user must first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to the UConnect and then send the address book entry via Bluetooth Please see your phone owners manual for specific instructions on how to drop the Bluetooth connection e If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it will be use only the first 24 characters Edit Entries in the UConnect Phonebook NOTE Editing names in the phone book is recom mended when vehicle is not in motion e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATUR
78. not return to normal seek authorized service immediately CAUTION Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the en gine running as you would not be able to react to the temperature indicator if the engine overheats The gauge pointer will remain near its last reading when the engine is turned off It will return to a true reading when the engine is restarted 4 Low Fuel Warning Light This indicator lights when the fuel gauge reads 1 8 of a tank or less ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 169 5 Seat Belt Reminder Light This light comes on for several seconds after the ignition is turned ON as a reminder to buckle up This light will remain on as long as the driver or passengers seat belt remains unbuckled If the seat belt indicator remains on and or flashes with belts buckled this may indicate a fault in the seat belt reminder system Have the system checked by an authorized dealer 6 Coolant Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi ART tion For a bulb check this light will come on momentarily when the ignition is turned On If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle shift into N Neutral and increase the engine speed for 2 to 3 minutes If the temperature reading does not return to normal seek authorized service immediately As temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set thresh
79. of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they re commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturers directions it provides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier To
80. operation When the alarm is activated the system provides both audible and visual signals The horn will sound repeatedly for three minutes and the headlights and taillights will flash for an addi tional 15 minutes NOTE The Panic and Security alarms are quite different Please take a moment to activate the Panic and the Security modes to hear the differences in the horn In case one should go off in the future you will need to know which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it To Arm the System Remove the keys from the ignition switch and exit the vehicle Lock the doors and liftgate by pressing the power door lock switch or the Lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter Close all doors The Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light located in the instru ment cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to signal that the system is arming During this 16 second pre arm period opening any door or the liftgate will cancel the arming process If the system arms success fully the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate the alarm is set Manually locking the doors with the door lock plunger located on the inside of the doors or the driver s door key lock cylinder will not arm the system ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 To Disarm the System Either press the Unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter
81. other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers 324 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory manual When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR installed options or dealer installed options must be con or GCWR ratings sidered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for the maximum com bined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle Improper towing can lead to an injury accident Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing Towing Requirements as safe as possible To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended CAUTION Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident e Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles 805 km of vehicle operation Doing so may damage your vehicle e During the first 500 miles 805 km of trailer towing limit your speed to 50 mph 80 km h ee STARTING AND OPERATIN
82. plain water alone or alcohol base antifreeze coolant products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the antifreeze coolant and may plug the radiator This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based antifreeze coolant Use of Propylene Glycol base antifreeze coolant is not recommended Adding Engine Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved antifreeze coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals This antifreeze coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100 000 miles before replacement To prevent reducing this ex tended maintenance period it is important that you use the same antifreeze coolant throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT antifreeze coolant When adding antifreeze coolant a minimum solution of 50 recommended Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent in water should be used Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369 Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water antifreeze coolant solu tion The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s resp
83. referred to as ESP ABS Anti Lock Brake System This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Section 5 of this manual for more information about ABS WARNING ABS Anti Lock Brake System cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ABS cannot prevent accidents in cluding those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M TCS Traction Control System This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will
84. right hand release handle to slide the panel back into the vehicle 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Windshield Wiper Washer Switch If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned OFF the wiper will automatically return to the Park position When the vehicle is restarted the wiper will resume function at whichever position the switch is set at If the swing gate flip up window is open or the swing gate is open connection to the rear window wiper is interrupted preventing activation of the rear wiper blade When the swing gate flip up window or the swing gate is closed the rear wiper switch or the ignition switch needs to be turned OFF and then to ON to restart the rear wiper NOTE The rear swing gate will lock while the rear wiper is operating The gate will stay locked until the wiper is turned off and the gate is unlocked by key lock switch or key fob es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 Adding Washer Fluid The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer is shared It is located in the front of the engine compartment and should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with wind shield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and oper ate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water Rear Window Defroster If Equipped The push button is located on the bottom of the blower con trol knob Pres
85. s seat belt for the outboard position but you must use the vehicle s seat belt at the center position If your child restraints are not LATCH compatible you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle s seat belts Please refer to the next section for typical installation instructions Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that were provided with the child restraint system The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seat back and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces Tether Strap Mounting Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or Latch Anchorages connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a In addition there are tether strap anchorages behind each means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward rear seating position located on the back of the seat facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant rest
86. sare e deae tus 154 Cargo Slide Out System Load N G0 dogs ach pere EEEa 156 Cargo Tie Downs lese 153 Cargo Vehicle Loading iilis 313 Catalytic Converter 1 6 6 0 eee eee eee 359 CD Compact Disc Player Maintenance 234 Cellular Phone eere RAE id eR 87 Center High Mounted Stop Light 393 Certification Label 0 000000 00008 313 Changing A Flat Tite 42425264 o RE ees 336 Charing na aa RE edes dos 341 Chart Tite Sizing e tere ee tt ane ene 280 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light otc he Pak eae bre E PX DR gee Boa 351 Checks Safety kee we sta ER eee RN 77 78 Child Restraint 4 cues e ae eee 66 67 71 73 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 70 71 Child Safety Locks 4 4 e erre 32 Climate Control erea kar dade ee uere Rma 235 COCK 0 22 sem crea Ree aedes 199 215 226 Coin Holder i 9 ER RR kn 152 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 234 Compass iss e aee e 180 183 189 Compass Calibration 0 183 190 Compass Variance llle 182 190 Computer Trip Travel ossaa terbau ris eneee 188 Console knees Gee e eer ees 152 Console Floor llle 152 Contract Service 2222222 4 ple EY 408 Converter Catalytic s tanta Wa EEES 359 Cooling System veces py drea e hea si 366 Adding Coolant Antifreeze issu 368 Coolant Capacity sds eca eia eed eins 394 Coolant Level eem a ain hh ep ee a 370 Disposal of
87. the low tire pressure value flashing 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warn ing limit in any of the four active road tires 4 The EVIC will display a graphic showing the tire pressure value in place of the flashing low tire pressure value The EVIC will also display a SPARE LOW PRESSURE message to remind you to service the flat tire NOTE Vehicles with Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 305 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle the TPM Telltale Light will remain ON and a chime will sound In addition the graphic in the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for 3 seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC
88. this situation is encountered operate the transmission in a lower gear to increase engine RPM coolant flow and fan speed When stopped in heavy traffic it may be necessary to shift into N Neutral and depress the accelerator slightly for fast idle operation to increase coolant flow and fan speed 240 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an automatic recirculation system When the system senses a heavy load or high heat conditions it may use partial Recirculation A C mode to provide additional comfort Winter Operation When operating the system during the winter months make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of ice slush snow or other obstruc tions Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air condi tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of com pressor damage when the system is started again STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS li Starting Procedures 0 40404 e 245 W Manual Transmission If Equipped 249 Manual Transmission less 245 6 Speed Manual Transmission Automatic Transmission 0 245 WH Automatic Transmission
89. to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain airbag is only about 3 inches 9 cm thick when it is inflated The front passenger seat assembly contains critical com ponents that affect the front passenger airbag deploy ment Correctly functioning front passenger seat compo nents are critical for the Occupant Classification System OCS to properly classify the front passenger and calcu late the proper airbag deployment Do not make any modifications to the front passenger seat components assembly or to the seat cover The following requirements must be strictly adhered to Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or components in any way Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not designated for the specific model being repaired Al ways use the correct seat cover specified for the vehicle Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat cover Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those approved by DaimlerChrysler Mopar At no time should any supplemental restraint system SRS component or SRS related component or fas tener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler Mopar ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 WARNING Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the front
90. when the lever is moved check for a defective turn signal LED A single chime is activated when the left right turn signal is left on with the engine RPM vehicle speed greater than 15 mph 24 km h for more than one mile 13 Transmission Temperature Warning Light If Equipped This light indicates that there is excessive trans mission fluid temperature that might occur with severe usage such as trailer towing If this light comes on stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster with the transmission in N Neutral until the light goes off 14 Brake Warning Light The red BRAKE warning light will come on when the ignition key is first turned on and stay on briefly as a 172 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS bulb check If the bulb does not come on during starting see your authorized dealer for service If the light stays on it may be an indication that the parking brake has not been released or there is a low brake fluid level If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or a problem with the Brake Booster In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake Booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake The BRAKE warning light will flash whether or not it is in gear if the park brake is app
91. ya RR Ue NUS CRUS 116 Rear Folding cece eee 118 Reclining i222 heen RR er Rs 114 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 170 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 395 Selection of Oll esu erri dasa esos es 356 Sentry Key Immobilizer 0 14 Sentry Key Programming 000 16 Sentry Key Replacement less 15 Service Assistance 0 eee ee eee 406 Service CONAC sna acrius unes tan as e oe anb la o 408 Service Manuals eee eee 410 Setting the Clock 4e m aac as 199 215 226 Settings Personal 43 ERR YS 193 Shift Lock Manual Override 253 Shift Speeds Manual Transmission 251 Shifting Automatic Transmission 255 260 Manual Transmission 249 Shoulder Belts reau see dare oe Gwe Rar REO 40 Signals Turn seci cara nesae ss 125 171 390 391 392 Sliding Cargo Floor Load N GO 5 4 cxcGox e Cates be ea Cx Crea 156 Snow Chains Tire Chains 294 Spare Tire geaik hy takers het wore eH ois 337 Spark PMS i i eee Rt Hae PEE Oe eH 358 Specifications Fuel Gasoline sesering warnae iadnn 306 Ol setae pai alae a a aa an ed 356 Speed Control Cruise Control 128 Speedometer 23 552 ik X es PE Gd tad ede 170 DATING srera ace go esce doe d DR e Ene UR a d 245 Automatic Transmission 430 INDEX aa Cold Weather llle 246 Emergency Jump Starting
92. you require service after your manufactur er s new vehicle limited warranty expires please refer to your contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased your new vehicle Your dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with your ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 409 WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and provisions of DaimlerChrysler s warranties applicable to this vehicle MOPAR PARTS Mopar fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from your dealer They will help you keep your vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or caus
93. 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The UConnect system does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell phone directly Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UCon nect system to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the cell phone has network coverage and stays paired to the UConnect system Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance NOTE The Towing Assistance number dialed is based on the Country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for USA 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the 24 Hour Towing Assistance cover age details in the Warranty information booklet and on the 24 Hour Towing Assistance Card Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the UConnect system Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system
94. 2 seconds if someone uses an invalid key to start the engine NOTE A key which has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle During normal operation after turning on the ignition switch the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will turn on for three 3 seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid key to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two 2 seconds ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 If the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle ser viced as soon as possible NOTE e The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible with some after market remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting prob lems and loss of security protection e Exxon Mobil Speed Pass additional Sentry Keys or any other transponder equipped components on the same key chain will not cause a key related transpon der fault unless the additional part is physically held against the ignition key b
95. 442154 n n 153 Venting Sunroof Express 146 Cargo Light ss ene bh dee 153 Sunshade Operation illus 146 Cargo Tie Down Hooks liess 153 Wind Buffeting yd e eb eee ege 146 Cargo Load Floor If Equipped 154 Sunroof Maintenance 00 147 Rear Cargo Slide Out System Load N Go Bi Electrical Power Outlet 000 147 TCERUIDDEG sinaki 158 Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off 148 Bl Rear Window Features 00 157 H Power Inverter c RR 149 Bea gow Vapen Vaser ccs IE Bappa vua B Cup Holders sui gee ret cure A RAW 151 Rear Wandowe Detect FEED eet sisisi Ie d oro PP eee 152 ma Root Luggage hark Nom BOnCH OE aisa toU Front Storage Compartment 152 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 MIRRORS A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and Inside Day Night Mirror vertical adjustment of the mirror The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward rear of truck The mirror should be adjusted 3o while set in the day position toward windshield Adjusting Rearview Mirror 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror will automatically adjust for annoying head light glare from vehicles behin
96. 4edT D 15 seconds before trying again Ignition Key Positions es STARTING AND OPERATING 247 WARNING WARNING Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing mission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel serious personal injury could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly Refer to Section 6 of this manual for proper jump starting procedures and follow them carefully If the engine has been flooded it may start to run but not have enough power to continue running when the key is 248 STARTING AND OPERATING ME released If this occurs continue cranking with the accel erator pedal pushed all the way to the floor Release the accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running smoothly If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather procedures should be repeated After Starting The idle speed will auto
97. ASHER DOMELIGHT FRONT FOG LIGHT HOOD RELEASE LOWERAIR RECIRCULATION CONVERTIBLE TRACTION ALL WHEEL FAILURE OF ANTI LOCK WASHER FLUID LEVEL OUTLET A WINDOW DOWN CONTROL DRIVE BRAKING SYSTEM 7i 3 2005 Ot Cy v 4WD BRAKE WINDSHIELD LIFTGATE RELEASE ELECTRONIC BRAKE SYSTEM ENGINE OIL REAR WINDOW ELECTRICALLY PARK LIGHTS REARFOGLAMP ANDLIFTGATE DEFROSTAND VENTILATINGFAN WINDOW LOCK THROTTLE FOURWHEEL WARNING PARKING DEFROST HEATED OPEN LOWER AIR OUTLET GONTROL DRIVE BRAKE as m rria X9 mb 3l i ae TOW LJ HAUL VOICE BATTERY HEATED MIRROR WINDSHIELD INSTUMENT PANEL SEAT BELT SLIDING DOOR TRUNK DECK AIRCONDITIONING __ CHILD SEAT RECOGNITION WARNING TOW HAUL CHARGING DEFROST ILLUMINATION RELEASE TETHER ANCHOR BUTTON C8 F er 2 i OR CS wy t LOW LOWER ANCHORS GLOW PLUG POWER WINDSHIELD WIPER SIDE AIRBAG AIRBAG SLIDINGDOOR EMERGENCY LIGHTER ANDTETHERFOR UGONNECT HAZARD FOUR WHEEL STEERING FLUID AND WASHER RELEASE HANDLE CHILDREN LATCH BUTTON DRIVE Low C E E f bo Ol M MALFUNCTION TRANS ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL PASSENGER DOOR AJAR CONVERTIBLE CONVERTIBLE HORN SEE OWNER S 8191e970 INDICATOR LIGHT OIL TEMP TEMPERATURE RESTRAINT SYSTEM AIRBAG OFF TOP DOWN TOP UP MANUAL ISO B INTRODUCTION 7 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures which could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures which could result
98. At A Desired Speed 129 TO Deactivate i5 a sce aces races RR ee doe e 129 To Resume Speed ssssssss 129 To Vary The Speed Setting 129 Manual Transmission sss 130 To Accelerate For Passing 130 lectronic Brake Control System 131 ABS Anti Lock Brake System 131 TCS Traction Control System 132 BAS Brake Assist System 132 ERM Electronic Roll Mitigation 133 ESP Electronic Stability Program 134 ESP BAS Warning Lamp 137 ll Garage Door Opener If Equipped 137 Programming HomeLink Gate Operator Canadian Programming 141 Using Homelink reres oni be dade inis 142 Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button 142 SeCHEICY iss Sab Ravi a Nowe Paw aan 143 Troubleshooting Tips 06 143 General Information 143 ll Power Sunroof If Equipped 144 Opening Sunroof Express 145 Closing Sunroof Express 145 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Pinch Protect Feature 00 145 Console Storage Compartment 152 Pinch Protect Override 146 W Cargo Area Features 20
99. Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the child protection locks are engaged NOTE For emergency exit with the system engaged move the lock plunger up unlocked position roll down window and open the door with the outside door handle Inserting Ignition Key ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 WINDOWS Power Windows The power window controls are located on the driver s door trim panel There is a single switch on the front passenger door rear doors which operates the front passenger rear passenger door windows The window controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACCESSORY position Power Window Switches The power window switches remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned off For vehicles equipped with a Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC this feature is programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Delay 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See Power Off to Accessories Until Exit in Section 4 of this manual Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature WARNING Never leave children in a vehicle with the keys in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the win dows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious i
100. Certified SAE 10W 30 engine oil refer to oil viscosity chart for cor rect SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Engine Oil Filter Mopar Engine Oil Filter P N 5281090 or equivalent Spark Plugs 3 7 Liter ZFR6F 11G Gap 0 043 Spark Plugs 4 0 Liter ZFR5LP 13G Gap 0 050 Fuel Selection 3 7L Engines 87 Octane R M 2 Method Fuel Selection 4 0L Engines 87 Octane R M 2 Method Acceptable 89 Octane R M 2 Method Pre ferred 396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Chassis Component Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Automatic Transmission Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Manual Transmission Mopar Manual Transmission Lubricant or equivalent meeting the re quirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 9224 Transfer Case Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Front Axle SAE 80W 90 Multipurpose Type GL 5 Gear Lubricant or equivalent Rear Axle SAE 75W 140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent Brake Master Cylinder Manual Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE Transmission Clutch System J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only rec ommended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS E Emission Control System Maintenance 398 Required Maintenance Intervals W Maintenance Schedule
101. D recordable compact discs CD R rewritable com pact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than an inch a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the disc number the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 220 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 inch 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the r
102. EATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 UConnect System Features Language Selection To change the language that the UConnect system is using e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais if so equipped e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every UConnect language change opera tion only the language specific 32 name phone book is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect system is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the UConnect system will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is only supported in the USA NOTE The emergency number dialed is based on the Country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for USA and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area
103. EHICLE 155 The cargo load floor is held by spring loaded latches In 2 Lift cover order to use the cargo load floor use the following procedure 3 Flip cover over and lock panel back into position 1 Push side mounted release handles toward center of vehicle to release cover Load Floor Floor Panel 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x Rear Cargo Slide Out System LOAD N GO If Equipped The sliding cargo load floor LOAD N GO slides back and forth on steel tracks for convenience The maximum load capacity is 400 lbs 181 kg The floor panel can stop every 2 inches 50 mm when the handle is released to lock the panel in position 1 Open the tailgate 2 Squeeze the right hand release handle 819a9bfc Release Handle en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 3 Pull out the sliding panel REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Wiper Washer If Equipped A rotary ring switch on the control lever located on the right side of the steering column controls operation of the rear wiper washer function Rotating the center of the switch up to the On position will activate the wiper Rotating the switch ring beyond the On or Off position will activate the rear washer The wash pump will continue to operate as long as the lever or ring is engaged Upon release the wipers will cycle three times before returning to the set position Sliding Panel 4 Squeeze the
104. ES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se e You will then be asked for the name of the phone book entry that you wish to edit e Next choose the number designation home work mobile or pager that you wish to edit e When prompted recite the new phone number for the phone book entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phone book you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature Delete Entries in the UConnect Phonebook NOTE Editing phone book entries is recommended when vehicle is not in motion e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phone book entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phone book from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the Voice Recognition button while the UConnect system is playing the desired entry and say Delete ee
105. G 325 e When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not over e Total weight must be distributed between the tow load your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a vehicle and the trailer such that the following four loss of control poor performance or damage to brakes ratings are not exceeded axle engine transmission steering suspension chas 1 GVWR sis structure or tires 2 GTW e Safety chains must always be used between your 3 GAWR vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight e Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact P Park With a manual transmission shift the trans spare tire mission into R Reverse Always block or chock the trailer wheels Towing Requirements Tires Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to the e GCWR must not be exceeded Tires General Information section of this manual on Tire Pressures for proper tire inf
106. HICLE 43 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap portion pull up a bit on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision WARNING A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdo men Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer and have it fixed 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt Removing Slack From Belt 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 6 To release the belt push the red button marked PRESS on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow it to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not
107. Light 4 sie Rm mh WL212 2 Liftgate Lamp xs zs cer Ee tg EES 567 Overhead Console Lights PLW214 2A Reading Light 0 0 000 WL212 2 LIGHT BULBS Outside Bulb No Headlights i2 ca RR rr eee 9008 H13 Front Parks Tutti 2x 34 3 exe Rei 3157AK Front Sidemarker 0 00 00 eee nee 168 back Up see ce tract dexter e Sak veg Center High Mounted Stoplight koe Lamp cna Sees sega sede ees ees License Plate Light clesie eise Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal BULB REPLACEMENT Head Light 1 Open the hood 2 Reach behind the headlamp unit in the engine com partment to access the headlamp bulb lock ring 3 Firmly grasp the lock ring on the back of the headlamp unit housing 4 Rotate the lock ring on the back of the headlamp housing counter clockwise to unlock it CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 5 Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb Left Front Turn Signal 1 Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right full right lock 2 Remove the door in the left wheel liner by twisting counter clockwise Access to the bulb can be gained through the wheel liner hole 3 Disconnect the electrical connector 4 Twist the bulb counter clockwise to remove ee MAINTAINING
108. ON or OFF appears Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit When ON is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the P Park or N Neutral position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Remote Key Unlock When Driver Door 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press of the remote keyless entry unlock button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When All Doors Ist Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Driver Door 1st Press or All Doors 1st Press appears ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 195 Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when the remote keyless entry Lock button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the flash lights on lock unlock feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter This feature may be se
109. Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When mm writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read 222 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS M files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names mH e Level 1 12 including a separator and a 3 character extension mm e Level 2 31 including
110. Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa tion e Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset e Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION SELECT button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value e When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display e Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START po
111. QUALITY GRADES The following describes the tire grading categories estab lished by the National highway Traffic Safety Adminis tration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your car All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety Requirements in Addition to These Grades Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled con ditions on a specified government test course For ex ample a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction Grades The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 413
112. R VEHICLE 393 4 Remove the two screws attaching the backplate to the lamp assembly 5 Pull the backplate straight back from the lamp hous ing 6 Disconnect the electrical connector 7 Remove the bulb from the backplate Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL 1 Remove the two screws securing the CHMSL 2 Disconnect the electrical connector and washer hose if equipped from CHMSL 3 Replace the CHMSL 7 394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FLUID CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate 19 5 Gallons 73 8 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 3 7 Liter Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified Engine Oil 5 Ots 4 7 Liters 4 0 Liter Engine SAE 10W 30 API Certified Engine Oil 6 Ots 5 7 Liters Cooling System 3 7 Liter Engine Mopar Antifreeze Engine Coolant 5 Year 14 Ots 13 Liters 100 000 Mile Formula 4 0 Liter Engine Mopar Antifreeze Engine Coolant 5 Year 14 Ots 13 Liters 100 000 Mile Formula ncludes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Engine Coolant Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Or ganic Additive Technology or equivalent Engine Oil 3 7L Engine Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 engine oil meeting material standard MS 6395 or equivalent Engine Oil 4 0L Engine Use API
113. RATING 327 WARNING Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hy draulic brake lines It can overload your brake sys tem and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis tance When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident Towing Requirements Trailer Lights amp Wiring Wherever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness 328 STARTING AND OPERATING The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations RIGHT STOP TURN mie LEFT FEMALE STOP TURN Hi PINS PARK B GND MALE PIN 813262be 4 Pin Connector RUNNING BATTERY LAMPS BACKUP LAMPS LH STOP RH TURN STOP TURN ELECTRIC GROUND 5 O BRAKES 812634c6 7 Pin Connector en STARTING AND OPERATING 329 Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic If using a manual transmission vehicle for tr
114. RE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 For occupants classified into the child size category the PAD Indicator Light will be illuminated indicating that the front passenger airbag is turned off and will not inflate If the PAD Indicator Light is not illuminated DO NOT assume the airbag is turned off and move the child restraint to the rear seat A deploying passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to a child in a rear facing infant seat NOTE Even though this vehicle is equipped with an Occupant Classification System children 12 years and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint Passenger Air Front Passenger bag Disable Seat Occupant PAD Indica Airbag Status tor Light Grocery Bags Heavy Briefcases and Other Rela ON OFF tively Light Objects Empty or Very Small Objects OFF OFF Since the system senses weight some small objects will turn the PAD Indicator Light on The OCS classifies an occupant using weight sensors mounted in the base of the front passenger seat Any weight on the seat will be sensed by the system Objects hanging on the seat or other passengers pushing down on the seat will also be sensed The weight of an adult will cause the system to turn the airbag on In this case 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee the OCS has classified the occupant of the seat as an adult An adult occupant needs t
115. S Guide SALES CODE RER AM FM CD DVD RADIO WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate Satellite Navigation Radio with CD Player with MP3 Capability RER combines a Global Positioning System based navigation system with an integrated color screen to provide maps turn identification selection menus and instructions for selecting a variety of desti nations and routes This radio has a hard drive CD s can be ripped to the hard drive and the map data comes loaded on the hard drive Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions 226 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Clock Setting Procedure The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite The satellites clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the sys tem s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set To Manually Set the Clock 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON or ACC position 2 If the radio is off turn it on by pressing the ON OFF Volume radio knob 3 Press the Time soft key on the lower left side of the face of the radio 4 Press the HOUR or MIN soft ke
116. SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS E INTRODUCTION exem ex m RE UCer NEP ce Ee eile oe e levies 0 Sei Oe eh E T ra E T CE E e 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 02 c cc ccc ccc hh tmn 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE leere mnn 4 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 3 2 0 cee ccc cece c ccc ccc r eee hh hh 5 STARTING AND OPERATING cece ccc cece cer cccnecc rece t t mtn e WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2 0 ce cece ccc cece cece cece eee hh hh nn 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ssrssisssss istsr a cece cece cece hh hh m hn 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 2c cece cece c ccc c cece e eee hh hh i ht 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 2c cc cece ccccccccccvccecvcesvcesvces 10 INDEX Op EE INTRODUCTION CONTENTS E introduction 0 000 000 0040 4 Bl Warnings And Cautions 00 7 Mi Rollover Warning 6 6 eee piping 4 Bi Vehicle Identification Number 7 Bl How To Use This Manual 5 Bl Vehicle Modifications Alterations 8 4 INTRODUCTION M INTRODUCTION This manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents You are urged to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations
117. STRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se approximately 3 seconds If this light remains on or comes on during driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required See your authorized dealer immedi ately With the ABS malfunctioning the BAS and ESP are also switched off Both malfunction indicator lights illu minate with the engine running If the charging voltage falls below 10 volts the malfunction indicator light illuminates and the ABS is switched off When the voltage is above this value again the malfunction indi cator light should go out and the ABS is operational If the malfunction indicator light stays illuminated have the system checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible 20 Front Fog Light Indicator Light If Equipped 40 This light shows when the fog lights are ON 21 Oil Pressure Warning Light ur This light indicates that the engine oil pressure has become too low For a bulb check this light will come on momentarily when the ignition is turned On If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible Immediate service should be obtained 22 Airbag Warning Light The indicator lights and remains lit for 6 to 8 9 seconds when the ignition is first turned ON If N the light does not come on when the ignition is first turned on or the light stays on or comes on while driving have the airbag system c
118. System 238 Air Piltef 12s ecce phe e IP nom hea ede 361 Air Pressure Tires 0 000 cece eee 288 Airbag sacked s oe Ree eee eka eS 49 174 Airbag Deployment 2 4024 vad ped e b ew 61 Airbag LiGht uis oe annsi alan sete e a 63 77 Airbag Maintenance se 2s Maa oa 63 Alarm Panne 23s exce hs ata a Ko eke s 23 Alarm Security Alarm Alarm System Security Alarm 18 Alignment and Balance 06 293 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 8 Antenna Satellite Radio ls 228 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 394 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 131274 Anti Lock Warning Light ss 173 Anti Theft System 22x ens ere 18 170 Appearance Care 0 0 6 377 Auto Down Power Windows 34 Automatic Dimming Mirror ss 84 Automatic Transaxle llle 252 Automatic Transmission 255 260 374 Fluid and Filter Changes 374 Fluid Level Check 0 374 375 PQA Types iu p sra dope ep aet 374 396 Gear Ranges os ese pre Dune dees 255 Special Additives scs desa se keseg aatan s 375 Torque Convertet iz 2404 eoe ek 259 264 en INDEX 417 Autostick aces Gd ac ae Re oN lees Ro ES 262 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet Power Outlet 147 Auxiliary Power Outlet 0000 147 Axle Fl id 4 22d ssec ERROR EE Re 396 Battery Neolana aa Xue ERO UR Ve A I RE es 362
119. TANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights rotate the center portion of the multi function control lever up or down NOTE If the driver s door is left open and the head lights or parking lights are left on the High Beam Indicator Light will flash and a chime will sound Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned off a chime will sound when the driver s door is opened Headlight Dimmer Switch Push the multi function control lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the lever to wards you to switch the headlights back to low beam Passing Light You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multi function control lever toward the steering wheel This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and remain on until the lever is released Front Fog Lights If Equipped 40 The front fog light switch is in the multi function control lever To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking or low beam headlights and pull out the end of the lever NOTE The fog lights will only operate with the parking lights or the headlights on low beam Selecting high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 Turn Signals Move the multi function control lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster
120. Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or counter clockwise to decrease the frequency 216 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Press the rotary TUNE control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for 5 seconds Pressing the Music Type button or turning the TUNE control knob within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to be selected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type informa tion Toggle the Music Type button to select the follo
121. UR VEHICLE ee LIFTGATE The vacuum fluorescent VF display located in the odometer area displays the word GATE as an indica tion of when the liftgate is not completely closed When the vehicle is not moving and the liftgate is not com pletely closed the VF display will show the word GATE On EVIC equipped vehicles GATE AJAR will be displayed If any other active warnings are present they will be shown in the VF display and will also continue to cycle If the vehicle is moving three single chimes will occur if the rear liftgate is open one chime for each complete display cycle After this the VF display will continue to sequence only no chimes If the trip reset button is pressed while the VF warnings are being displayed the VF display will revert back to only displaying the odometer trip odometer mileage To open the liftgate pull up squeeze on the handle and lift Manually unlocking the vehicle doors with the plunger or a key in the lock cylinder will not unlock the liftgate 8192b8ae Liftgate Release E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 NOTE The front airbags have a multi stage inflator nd design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your pas Please pay close attention to the information in this B sengers could be i
122. Use caution when cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric defrosters Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381 Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft tissue Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage will also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use Mopar Total Clean a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly FUSES INTEGRATED POWER MODULE The Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM is located in the engine compartment near the battery This center contains cartridge fuses mini fuses and relays A label that identifies each component is printed on the inside of the cover Integrated Power Module TIPM
123. Used Coolant nn INDEX 419 Drain Flush and Refill 367 Inspection axe ere neP re ae rc eS 366 Points to Remember 00 05 370 Pressure Cap docs lt 4 exte oo SG bgt eens 369 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 367 394 395 Temperature Gaugen ne Trta gean a BE 168 Corrosion Protection 0 00005 377 Crankcase Emission Control System 361 Cup Holder 2 scusa e rh RE 151 Customer Assistance lel 406 Data Recorder Event lille 64 Daytime Running Lights 125 Dealer Service llle 353 Defroster Rear Window 159 Defroster Windshield 78 237 Delay Intermittent Wipers 126 Diagnostic System Onboard 350 Dimmer Switch Headlight 124 170 Dipsticks Oil Engitie 3 uar Ier ee Ra nete 354 Disposal Engine Oll s sies d obese bee noke nia 357 Used Coolant Antifreeze lesen 369 DOOr LOCKS ssi reanimarea area REUS oer e aar as 27 Door Opener Garage meiride a annk a 137 Drive Belts i1265 kem y 406 nea ha ee esas 358 DIVING buo sce eaten ed es eee 3 Bute tee 268 Off Pavement ma Tire sa ee eee 268 OfERoad sse eae betes pe PE OS o Res 268 DVD Player Video Entertainment System 231 Electric Remote Mirrors lessen 85 Electrical Outlet Auxiliary Power Outlet 147 Electrical Power Outlets
124. WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 416 INDEX ME About Your Brakes secese toasa sanea aS 272 ABS Anti Lock Brake System 173 274 Adding Fuel 422 au ERR RE RE Ern 310 Adding Washer Fluid 00 159 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 361 Air Conditioner Maintenance 362 Air Conditioning isle 235 238 Air Conditioning Controls 238 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 239 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 363 Air Conditioning
125. WARNING e The Anti Lock Brake System ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent accidents including detrimental effects of electronic interference caused by improperly installed after market radios or telephones NOTE During severe braking conditions a pulsing sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard This is normal indicating that the Anti Lock Brake System is functioning WARNING those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others To use your brakes and accelerator more safely follow these tips e Do not ride the brakes by resting your foot on the pedal This could overheat the brakes and result in unpredictable braking action longer stopping dis tances or brake damage When descending mountains or hills repeated brak ing can cause brake fade with loss of braking control Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmission or locking out overdrive whenever pos sible Engines may idle
126. XXX amount equals 1400 Ibs and there will be five 150 Ib passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 Ibs ee STARTING AND OPERATING 285 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load cargo luggage and towing capaci ties of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle NOTE For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 Ibs 392 kg 286 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Occupants Combined weight of AVAILABLE TOTAL FRONT REAR occupants and cargo MINUS Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 130 Ib Occupant 3 160 Ib 100 Ibs 80 Ibs EXAMPLE 1 865 Ibs Occupant 1 210 lbs Occupant 2 180 I
127. YOUR VEHICLE 391 Right Front Turn Signal 1 Open the hood 2 Reach behind the headlamp unit in the engine com partment to access the turn signal bulb 3 Twist the bulb counter clockwise to remove 4 Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb Front Side Marker 1 Open the hood 2 Remove the grille assembly as follows a Remove eight fasteners b Remove two screws from each headlamp c Remove two scrivets from the center of the grille d Remove one push pin from the top of each fender e Pull the grille assembly toward you to disconnect the grille clips to the fender and the headlamp ball studs to the front end module 3 Disconnect electrical connector 4 Turn the bulb counterclockwise to remove Front Fog Light Front Fascia Mounted 1 Reach between the front fascia and wheel liner from under the vehicle 2 Turn the front fog light bulb 1 4 turn counter clock wise to remove from housing 3 Disconnect the electrical connector and replace bulb 392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal and Back Up Lights 1 Open the lift gate 819e23d7 2 Remove the two push pins 3 Pull lamp straight back and disconnect electrical con nection ee MAINTAINING YOU
128. YSTEM SALES CODE XRV IF EQUIPPED The optional VES Video Entertainment System con sists of a DVD player and LCD liquid crystal display screen a battery powered remote control and two head sets Refer to your VES User s Manual for detailed operating instructions 232 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS M The LCD screen is located on the headliner behind the front seats Press the release button and lower the screen 8161d54e Remote Control Location SES SESS Overhead Display Screen ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 233 REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS IF The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a push EQUIPPED button in the center Pressing the top of the switch will The remote sound system controls are located on the rear increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to switch will decrease the volume th itches vu E MR The button located in the center of the right hand control will switch modes to Radio or CD The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push mm button in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation BACK VIEW OF Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next STEERING WHEEL listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch 81907007 will SEEK
129. act a physician immediately Clean up any ground spills im mediately Engine Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating tempera ture the level of the antifreeze coolant in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is not need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for antifreeze coolant freeze point or replacing antifreeze coolant Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional antifreeze coolant is needed to main tain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is normally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulat ing on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens allowing hot antifreeze coolant to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant bottle ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371 Check antifreeze coolant fr
130. adio And MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD Video 206 With Navigation System If Equipped 225 Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files 208 Operating Instructions Satellite Radio 226 List Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Clock Setting Procedure 226 Play tie Ripe eh boos se eee E d 210 Bl Satellite Radio RSC If Equipped Info Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA RER REQ REN Radios Only 227 Fay MR OE 210 ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 165 System Activation 0 000 227 W Video Entertainment System Sales Code XRV Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification IU ERDIDBOU eee tO pegas eee ee Rees 231 Number ENS SID 0 0 0000002 eee 228 W Remote Sound System Controls If Equipped 233 Selecting Satellite Mode 228 Radio Operation 00000 233 Satellite Antenna 00000040 228 CD Player exce ten ee Reception Quality 00 228 WM CD DVD Disc Maintenance Operating Instructions Satellite Mode 229 WM Climate Controls 00 0000 Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone Manual Air Conditioning And Heating lf Equipped asses et e hem eme e 231 SYSTE 1 ue ss eiue te e siehe m 3 Pei ee 235 Operating Instructions Video Entertainment Operating Tips 1 6 eee eee eee 239 System VES I
131. adio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE EBjecting with ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow to scroll through tracks faster in CD MP3 modes SCAN Button Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 221 TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of the current CD track title Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button Switches the Radio to the Radio mode RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track
132. adios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc 224 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS M LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after 5 seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available
133. ailer towing all starts must be in FIRST gear to avoid excessive clutch slippage Towing Tips Automatic Transmission The D range can be selected when towing However if frequent shifting occurs while in this range the 3 range should be selected NOTE Using the 3 3 7L engine or 4 4 0L engine range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend trans mission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation See Schedule B in section 8 of this manual for transmission fluid change intervals Towing Tips TOW HAUL If Equipped To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheat ing press the TOW HAUL button when driving in hilly areas or shift the transmission to Drive position 2 on more severe grades Refer to Transmission Shifting in this section Towing Tips Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Don t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed 330 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Towing Tips Cool
134. ain menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link UConnect System to a Cellular Phone To begin using your UConnect system you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your cellular phone owner s manual The UCon nect website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing The following are general phone to UConnect System pairing instructions e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted after the beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit pin number which you will later need to enter into your cellular You can enter any four digit pin number You will not need to remember this pin number after the initial pairing process For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the UConnect system a name for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name e You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between 1 and 7 1 being the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your UConnect system However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use connected to your UConnect System The priority allows the UConnect system to know which cellu
135. aint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar e Salt in the air near sea coast localities e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants e Bird droppings 378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION e Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder which will Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove Use Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish scratch metal and painted surfaces e Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of paint and decals Special Care e If you drive on salted or du
136. ake your selec tion press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Display Units of Measure in The EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until US or METRIC appears RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION Radio Broadcast Signals Your new radio will provide excellent reception under most operating conditions Like any system however car radios have performance limitations due to mobile op eration and natural phenomena which might lead you to believe your sound system is malfunctioning To help you understand and save you concern about these ap parent malfunctions you must understand a point or two about the transmission and reception of radio sig nals Two Types of Signals There are two basic types of radio signals AM or Amplitude Modulation in which the transmitted sound causes the amplitude or height of the radio waves to vary and FM or Frequency Modulation in which the frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound Electrical Disturbances Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during transmission They mainly affect the wave amplitude and thus remain a part of the AM reception They interfere very little with the frequency variations that carry the FM signal ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 197 AM Reception
137. ality lubricant such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild non abrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc Windshield Washers The fluid reservoir in the engine compartment should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent antifreeze not radiator antifreeze Operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water WARNING Commercial windshield washer solvents are flam mable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution 366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle
138. all For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the UConnect phone book Refer to Add Names to Your UConnect Phone book to learn how to store a name in the phone book The UConnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to phone book is recommended when vehicle is not in motion Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the voice recognition and it is recommended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob e When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Pager This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone book entry if desired e When prompted recite the phone number for the phone book entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 The UConnect system will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phone book with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32
139. and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for 2 seconds to complete the training If you are have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT 1 Garage Door Opener 2 Training Butor erase the channels 6 Firmly press and release the learn or training Gate Operator Canadian Programming button The name and color of the button may vary by Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig manufacturer nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for NOTE There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming step after the Learn button has been pressed 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLin
140. and the ignition is in the ON position Manual Shift Controls 250 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING When parking your vehicle always leave a manual transmission in first gear and apply the parking brake fully to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Never use any gear as a substitute for the parking brake CAUTION To drive as safely as possible and to prolong the life of your manual transmission follow these tips e Before shifting from a forward gear into reverse or from reverse to a forward gear stop vehicle com pletely Otherwise accelerated transmission wear may result Do not operate at sustained high engine or road speeds in lower gears Engine damage may result Do not downshift into a low gear while traveling at too high a speed for that gear Engine clutch or transmis sion damage may result Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal This causes heat buildup and damages the clutch When you slow down or go up a grade downshift as speed requires or the engine may overheat Never hold the vehicle stopped on a hill by using the clutch pedal The clutch may be damaged During cold weather you may experience increased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid warms up This is normal Push in the clutch pedal completely when shifting Otherwise transmission or clutch damage may result ee STARTING AND OPERATING 251 e When rocking a stuck vehicle by shi
141. apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in the Partial Off mode Refer to ESP Electronic Stability Program in this section BAS Brake Assist System The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the anti lock brake system ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 WARNING BAS Brake Assist System cannot prevent the natu ral laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions BAS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent acci dents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be ex
142. at higher speeds during warm up which could cause rear wheels to spin and result in loss of vehicle control Be especially careful while driving on slippery roads in close quarter maneuver ing parking or stopping Do not drive too fast for road conditions especially when roads are wet or slushy A wedge of water can es STARTING AND OPERATING 277 build up between the tire tread and the road This hydroplaning action can cause loss of traction braking ability and control After going through deep water or a car wash brakes may become wet resulting in decreased performance and unpredictable braking action Dry the brakes by gentle intermittent pedal action while driving at very slow speeds POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers 278 STARTING AND OPERATING Se NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate CAUTION that there is a problem with the power steering system Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
143. at it is not necessary to use a locking clip If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se belt However any seat belt system may loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary If the seat belt has a automatic locking retractor it will have a distinctive label Pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull the belt until it is all extracted from the retractor Allow the belt to return to the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint Refer to Automatic Locking Mode earlier in this section In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if by pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt you may need to do something more Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you
144. ator Light starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active The ESP TCS Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESP TCS Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions The ESP TCS Indicator Light becomes illuminated when the ESP Off button has been pressed or ESP is only partially available caused by lack of engine management or brake thermal model INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 173 17 Voltage Warning Light This light monitors the electrical system voltage The light should turn on momentarily as the engine is started If the light stays on or turns on while driving it indicates a problem with the charging system Immediate service should be obtained 18 SERV Service 4WD Indicator Light If Equipped The SERV 4WD Indicator Light will come on SERV when the ignition key is turned to the ON 4wD ys position and will stay on for 2 seconds If the light stays on or comes on during driving it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required 19 Anti Lock Brake Warning Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System fes which is described elsewhere in this manual This light will come on when the ignition key is turned to the ON position and may stay on for 174 IN
145. ator pedal after turn ing the control switch If the vehicle is stopped the ignition key must be in the ON position with the engine either RUNNING or OFF This shift cannot be completed if the key is in the ACC Accessory position NOTE The 4 wheel drive system will not allow shifts between 2WD 4WD LOCK if the front and or rear wheels are spinning no traction In this situation the AWD Indicator Light located in the display under the tachometer will flash At this time reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift NOTE Delayed shifting out of 4WD LOCK may be experienced due to uneven tire wear low tire pressure or excessive loading MP 140 Single Speed Full Time Transfer Case If Equipped Operating Information Precautions The MP 140 is a single speed HI range only transfer case which provides convenient full time all wheel drive No driver interaction is required This transfer case employs an inter axle differential that divides engine torque al most evenly with 48 percent torque to the front axle and 52 percent torque to the rear axle this allows the front and rear wheels to rotate at different speeds on all road surfaces The Brake Traction Control System BTC which combines standard ABS and Traction Control provides resistance to any wheel that is slipping to allow additional torque transfer to wheels with traction 268 STARTING AND OPERATING Se ON ROAD DRIVING TIPS Utility vehicl
146. ayed To change the zone press and release the odometer trip odometer reset button to increment the variance one step Repeat as necessary until the desired variance is achieved NOTE The factory default zone is 8 During program ming the zone value will wrap around from zone 15 to zone 1 Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic inaccurate or abnormal you may wish to calibrate the compass Prior to calibrat ing the compass make sure the proper zone is selected 184 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS See To Manually Calibrate the Compass Start the engine and leave the transmission in the P Park position Press and hold approximately 10 sec onds the odometer trip odometer reset button until the current variance zone number is displayed Release the odometer trip odometer reset button then press and hold again approximately 10 seconds until the direc tion is displayed with the CAL indicator on continu ously in the display To complete the compass calibration drive the vehicle in one or more complete 360 degree circles under 5 mph 8 km h in an area free from power lines large metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC IF EQUIPPED The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display It is located on the instrument cluster in the lower half of the fuel coolant t
147. be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM The Anti Lock Brake System ABS is designed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer es STARTING AND OPERATING 275 WARNING Significant over or under inflation of tires or mixing WARNING Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss of braking effectiveness on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop The Anti Lock Brake System conducts a low speed self test at about 12 mph 20 km h If you have your foot lightly on the brake while this test is occurring you may feel slight pedal movement The movement can be more apparent on ice and snow This is normal The Anti Lock Brake System pump motor runs during the self test at 12 mph 20 km h and during an ABS stop The pump motor makes a low humming noise during operation which is normal 276 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION The Anti Lock Brake System is subject to possible
148. be to the bottom edge of the fill Adding Fluid Fluid should be added only at filler hole until fluid begins to run out of the hole Drain First remove fill plug B then drain plug C Recom mended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 25 ft Ibs 20 34 N m CAUTION When replacing plugs do not overtighten You could damage them and cause them to leak Selection of Lubricant Use only manufacturer s recommended fluid refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377 Front Rear Axle Fluid Fluid Level Check Lubricant should be at bottom edge of the oil fill hole Adding Fluid Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level specified above Selection of Lubricant Use only manufacturer s recommended fluid refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on p
149. bs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 Ibs 325 Ibs Occupant 1 200 los TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 400 Ibs 811a4d11 es STARTING AND OPERATING 287 WARNING Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them 1 Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems You could lose control of your vehicle Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure 288 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 2 Economy Improper
150. can be used in place of any of the four road tires A spare with a pressure below the low pressure limit will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound However it will cause a SPARE LOW PRESSURE message to display in the EVIC Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings V The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will LJ illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires In addition the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display a graphic show ing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing 81826bed Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with low pressure those flashing in ee STARTING AND OPERATING 303 the EVIC graphic to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flash ing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Check TPMS Warning When a system fault is detected the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault wil
151. cceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur The recommended viscosity and quality grades are shown in Section 7 of this manual NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED Anew engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered as a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow the safety tips below E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for a extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte nance Have the exhaust system inspecte
152. control clockwise to increase or counter clockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Press the rotary TUNE control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Radio Mode Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for 5 seconds Pressing the Music Type button or turning the TUNE control knob within 5 seconds will ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 201 allow the program format type to be selected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type informa tion Toggle the Music Type button to select the following forma
153. d refer to Remote Starting System in this section e Your vehicle s key fob may have three or four buttons depending on the optional features purchased with your vehicle To Unlock the Doors and Liftgate Press and release the Unlock button on the key fob once to unlock the driver s door or twice to unlock all doors and the liftgate The parking lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors First This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors and the liftgate on the first press of the Unlock button on the key fob To change the current setting proceed as follows ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 On electronic vehicle information center EVIC equipped vehicles refer to Remote Key Unlock under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual On non EVIC equipped vehicles perform the following steps 1 Press and hold the Lock button on a programmed i e functional key fob for at least 4 seconds but not longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the Un lock button while still holding the Lock button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature from outside the vehicle by pressing the Lock and Unlock butt
154. d every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open e Always run the climate control in panel or floor mode when driving with any windows open even if only slightly to help keep fresh air circulating inside ve hicle Otherwise poisonous gases could be drawn into the vehicle Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned on If the bulb is not lit during starting have it replaced If the light stays on or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Defrosters Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper able Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Exam
155. d life of the batteries is from one to two years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a remote starting system This system allows the vehicle to be started from distances up to 300 feet 91 meters using the remote keyless entry key fob which is part of your ignition key In order to remote start your vehicle the hood the liftgate and all of the doors must be closed 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee To remote start your vehicle press and release the Remote Start button on the key fob twice within three seconds To indicate that the vehicle is about to start the parking lights will flash and the horn will sound briefly if programmed 8193fe7a Remote Start Button Once the engine starts it will run for 15 minutes To cancel remote start press and release the Remote Start button once To enter the vehicle while the engine is running during a remote start you must first unlock the vehicle using the Unlock button on the key fob Once the vehicle is unlocked you have 60 seconds to enter the vehicle and insert the key in the ignition and turn it to the ON position Otherwise the system will cancel the remote start and automatically turn off Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur e If the engine stalls or RPM exc
156. d restraint is not in use secure it in the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate collision it could strike the occupants or seat backs from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt and cause serious personal injury several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Older Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for chil dren who weigh 20 to 40 lbs 9 to 18 kg and who are e Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the older than one year These child seats are also held in the manufacturer s instructions tell you vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System in this section If the belt still cannot be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle
157. d rotate the key to the LOCK position Then remove the key ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle 80e54ed7 CAUTION Ignition Key Positions E as 7 5 y An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Key In Ignition Reminder If you open the driver s door and the key is in the ignition a chime will sound to remind you to remove the key NOTE The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC position SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded electronic chip transponder to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only keys that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two
158. d you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light in the button will indicate when the dimming feature is activated R Automatic Dimming Mirror 81789204 CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 Power Remote Conirol Mirrors WARNI 2 Use the mirror select switch located on driver s side door trim panel to adjust the view obtained in the outside mirrors Press the switch to the L or R for Left or Right mirror selection Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your right side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the right side mirror Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature Folding exterior mirrors are hinged and may be moved either forward or rearward to resist damage Power Mirror Switches Select a mirror and press one of the four arrows for the direction you want the mirror
159. dding Fuel in Section 5 of this manual for more details Oil Change Required with a single chime Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Menu button To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 188 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure Trip Functions Press and release the MENU button until one of the following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC e Average Fuel Economy e Distance To Empty e Elapsed Time e Display Units of Measure in
160. ding those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt must still be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Control ORC Module Like the front airbags the pretensioners are a single use item After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners they must be replaced Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s or front passenger s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will alert the driver or front passenger to buckle their seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will continue to ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s or front passenger s seat belt is buckled The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s or front passenger s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be en abled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps NOTE The foll
161. down for the next listenable station 234 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS ME The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next pre set station that you have programmed in the radio pre set push buttons CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The button in the center of the left hand switch changes CD s on the 6 Disc in dash CD changer radio This button does not function for all other radios CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep the CD DVD discs in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper paper CD labels or tape to the disc avoid scratching the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzine thinner cleaners or antistatic sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do notstore the disc where temperatures may become too high E INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 235 CLIMATE CONTROLS Manual Air Conditioning and Hea
162. e es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 WARNING Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a danger ous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause seri ous injury or death Programming HomeLink Before You Begin If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons erase all channels before you begin training To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage when programming 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Hold the battery side of the hand held transmitter away from the HomeLink button you wish to program Place the hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 3 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the indicator light in view 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the hand held transmitter button until the HomeLink indicator changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light then release both the HomeLink and hand held transmitter buttons Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates When it changes it is programmed It may take up to 30 seconds
163. e When driving in hilly areas towing a trailer carrying a heavy load etc and frequent transmission shifting oc curs press the TOW HAUL button This will improve performance and reduce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting When operating in TOW HAUL mode the transmission will shift to 3rd gear and 4th will be enabled under steady cruise conditions Tow Haul Button The TOW HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster to indicate when the switch has been activated Pressing the switch a second time restores normal operation If the TOW HAUL mode is desired the switch must be pressed each time the engine is started ee STARTING AND OPERATING 259 Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored for abnormal condi tions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage the transmission limp home mode will be engaged In this mode the transmission will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop To reset the transmission use the following procedure 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Move the shift lever to the P Park position 3 Turn off the engine be sure to turn the key to the LOCK position 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds then restart the en gine 5 Move the shift lever to the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation If
164. e tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale light ee STARTING AND OPERATING 299 e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly if equipped has a tire pressure monitoring sensor The matching full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires The TPMS will only monitor the pressure in the full size spare when it is used in place of a road tire Otherwise a spare with a pressure below the low pressure
165. e 358 Catalytic Converter ecce Crankcase Emission Control System Fuel Filter s uuu ans Wha aa E REUS Engine Air Cleaner Filter suus Maintenance Free Battery 362 Air Conditioner Maintenance 362 346 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Ss Power Steering Fluid Check 363 Driveline And Steering Component L brication 4 peso Gin HAR abe FR re 364 Body Lubrication 0040 364 Windshield Wiper Blades 365 Windshield Washers lessen 365 Exhaust System llle 366 Cooling System csse sese gees 366 Hoses And Vacuum Vapor Harnesses 371 Brake System ax does xe ede ons 372 Automatic Transmission sss 374 Hydraulic Clutch Fluid Manual Trans MISSION 3 32 sos anexo e are we RC cR De ae 375 Manual Transmission lesse 375 Transfer Case Front Rear Axle Fluid Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion ll Fuses Integrated Power Module Bl Replacement Light Bulbs ll Bulb Replacement Head Light Left Front Turn Signal Right Front Turn Signal Front Side Marker Front Fog Light Front Fascia Mounted Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal And Back Up Lights ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 347 Center High Mou
166. e Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation condition the oil change indicator message will illuminate this means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 399 NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicles oil if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illumi nated e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or 6 months whichever comes first Your dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If this sched uled oil change is performed by someone other than your dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Oil Change Required in Use Factory Settings of the EVIC section in this manual or under Odometer Trip Odometer in the Instrument Cluster Descriptions section of this manual At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will
167. e Reminder System BeltAlert er ee cub 6 RETRRSTESQEES S 46 Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 48 Seat Belt Extender 0000 48 es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental Exhaust Gas s rere asa ee ERE oa ew ae ws 76 Restraint Systems SRS 0 0 00 0 49 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Child Restraint 4 146 RR ad 66 Vehiele 22 saves 2 sei xe apu EP EUM SACS Bl Engine Break In Recommendations 76 Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The V hicl uve YER ed bee Ba a 78 WM Safety Tips 6 ncssat ene kei aw EXER REX 76 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS You can insert the double sided keys into the locks with either side up 8163e6a8 Vehicle Key The keys for your new vehicle are enclosed in a plastic bag with the key code number on it If you received your keys without the bag ask your dealer to give you the number The key code can also be obtained by the dealer from your vehicle invoice Ignition Key Removal Manual Transmission Turn the key to the ACC position and then push the key and cylinder inward slightly and rotate the key to the LOCK position Then remove the key Automatic Transmission If Equipped Place the shift lever in P Park Turn the key to the ACC position and then push the key and cylinder inward slightly an
168. e SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into push button memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push button twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 Radio Mode These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you commit to push button memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes 206 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS ME Operation Instructions DISC MODE for CD and MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD VIDEO The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match in order for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD player it will not play the disc Customers may take their vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum of 5 times CAUTION The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions When this occurs the radio will indicate Disc Hot and shut off until a safe temperature is reached This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other radio internal components NOTE The
169. e and not need towing see your dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indica tor Light on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be per formed If the Malfunction Indicator Light is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic con verter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose improp erly installed or damaged A loose fuel filler cap message will be displayed in the instrument cluster Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle r
170. e injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administra tion NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer and the manufacturer 410 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Administra tor NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Washington DC 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when o
171. e severe injury or death to infants in that position 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Children that are not big enough to properly wear the vehicle seat belt should be secured in the rear seat in a child restraint or belt positioning booster seat Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint See Child Restraint in this section You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should use their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the front airbags room to inflate 4 Do not lean against the door or window airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door 5 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance in Section 9 of this manual ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 Airbag System Components Lea The airbag system consists of
172. e squirting out cause the battery to explode Md i pea the battery vent During cold weather when temperatures are below freezing point electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze Do not attempt jump starting because the battery could rupture or explode The battery tem 3 Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or perature must be brought up above freezing point of immobilized vehicle before attempting jump start 2 Personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE 6 Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent battery let the engine idle a few minutes then start the damage to your vehicle Use of safety chains is recom engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery mended Attach towing device to main structural mem bers of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brackets State and local laws applying to vehicles under tow must be observed 7 When removing the jumper cables reverse the above sequence exactly Be careful of the moving belts and fan 344 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME NOTE Transmission must be in N Neutral under any towing configuration Two Wheel Drive Vehicles Front Wheels Raised The speed must not exceed 30 mph 50 km h and the distance must not exceed 15 miles 25 km This vehicle may be towed with the transmission in N the ignition key in the LOCK positio
173. e to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from R Reverse P Park or N Neutral into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal es STARTING AND OPERATING 253 Shift Lock Manual Override If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a shift lock manual override The manual override may be used in the event that the shift lever should fail to move from Park with the key in the ON position and the brake pedal depressed To operate the shift lock manual override perform the following steps It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of P Park or N Neutral if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift 1 Firmly set the parking brake into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly on the brake pedal 2 Using a flat blade screwdriver carefully remove the mH shift lock manual override cover which is located on the PRNDL bezel 3 Depress and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 254 STARTING AND OPERATING EE 4 Using the screwdriver reach into the manual override 5 Move the shift lever into the N Neutral position opening Press and hold the shift lock lever down 6 Th
174. e vehicle may then be started in N Neutral Have your vehicle inspected by your local authorized dealer if the shift lock manual override has been used Brake Transmission Interlock System This system prevents you from moving the gear shift out of P Park and into any gear unless the brake pedal is pressed Always depress the brake pedal first before moving the gear selector out of P Park ee STARTING AND OPERATING 255 4 Speed Automatic Transmission 3 7L Engine Shifting from D Drive to P Park or R Reverse or from P or R to D should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake when moving the shift lever between these gears Automatic Shift Controls Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from P Park or N Neutral position into another gear range P Park This gear position supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use P Park while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range Always apply parking brake first then place the selector in P Park position WARNING Never use P Park position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage 256 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING It is dangerous to
175. ed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter Do not allow petroleum base fluid to contaminate the brake fluid as seal damage will result Automatic Transmission Selection of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor mance Use only manufacturer s recommended transmis sion fluid refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type It is important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer s recommended fluid will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type Fluid Level Check 42RLE 3 7L Engine Your vehicle is equipped with a capped dipstick tube it is sealed and should not be tampered with Your autho rized dealer has the proper tools to ensure that the fluid level is set properly ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375 Fluid Level Check W5A580 4 0L Engine Your vehicle is equipped with a capped dipstick tube it is sealed and should not be tampered with Your autho rized dealer has the proper tools to ensure that the fluid level is set properly Special Addi
176. ed to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscrip tion SET Button To Set the Push Button Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to push button memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into push button memory ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 231 You may add a second channel to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into push button memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push button twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to push button memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone lf Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 of this manual Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES mm Guide VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT S
177. ediately with large quantities of water A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam mable and explosive Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output that exceeds 12 volts 342 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this 1 Wear eye protection and remove all metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets which might make an unintended electrical contact 2 Park the booster vehicle within cable reach but with out letting the vehicles touch Set the parking brake place the automatic transmission in PARK and turn the ignition OFF on both vehicles 3 Turn OFF heater radio and all unnecessary electrical loads 4 Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery Connect the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result 5 Connect the other cable first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery Make sure you have a good contact on the engine E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 343 WARNING WARNING Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the Any procedure other than above could result in discharge battery The resulting electrical spark could 1 Personal injury caused by electrolyt
178. eed Manual Transmission Depressing the clutch pedal will disengage the speed control A slight increase in engine RPM before the speed control disengages is normal Vehicles equipped with manual transmissions may need to be shifted into a lower gear to climb hills without speed loss WARNING Speed Control can be dangerous where the system can t maintain a constant speed Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Don t use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery To Accelerate For Passing Depress the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Speed Control On Hills NOTE The speed control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without speed control ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that includes ABS Anti Lock Brake System TCS Traction Control System BAS Brake Assist System ERM Electronic Roll Mitigation and ESP Electronic Stability Program All five systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in vari ous driving conditions are commonly
179. eeds 2500 e Any engine warning lamps come on e The hood is opened The hazard switch is pressed The transmission is moved out of P Park ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 The vehicle can be started remotely a maximum of two times consecutively The vehicle is also allowed a maxi mum of one failed start where the remote start sequence was initiated but the engine stopped cranking without starting Following either of these conditions or if the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped is alarming or if the PANIC button was pressed the system must be reset before remote starting the vehicle again To reset the system insert a valid key into the ignition and turn it to the ON position and then back to the LOCK position DOOR LOCKS The vacuum fluorescent VF display located in the odometer area displays the word door as an indication of a door ajar or door not completely closed When the vehicle is not moving and the door is ajar or not completely closed the VF display will show the word door If any other active warnings including GATE or GAS CAP are present they will be shown in the VF display and will also continue to cycle If the vehicle is moving three single chimes will occur One chime for each complete display cycle three cycles total After this the display will continue to cycle only no chimes If the trip reset button is pressed while the VF warnings are being displayed the VF
180. eeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If antifreeze coolant needs to be added contents of coolant recov ery bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent antifreeze coolant additions are required or if the level in the recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain antifreeze coolant concentration at 50 HOAT antifreeze coolant minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean also e Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory cooling performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Hoses and Vacuum Vapor Harnesses Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage Hard or soft spots brittle rubber cracking tears cuts abrasions and exces sive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber Pay particular attention to the hoses nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold Inspect hose rout ing to be sure hoses do not touch any heat source or movi
181. egistration For states which have an I M Inspection and Maintenance requirement this check verifies the following the MIL Malfunction Indicator Light is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD On Board Diagnostic system is ready for testing Normally the OBD system will be ready The OBD system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced if you recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement If the OBD system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test 352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD system is ready you must do the following 1 Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch 2 Turn the ignition to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 3 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 4 As soon as you turn your key to the ON position you will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 5 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at
182. eing used when starting the vehicle Cell phones pagers or other RF electronics will not cause interference with this system All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Sentry Key is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove Sentry Keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit PIN number Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for dealer replacement of keys Duplication of keys may be performed at an 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Pro gramming procedure This procedure consists of pro gramming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one which has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to the dealer Customer Key Programming If you have two valid sentry keys you can program new sentry keys to the system by performing the following procedure 1 Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank s to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code 2 Insert the first valid key into the ignition sw
183. ellular phone to the UConnect system without terminating the call To transfer an ongo ing call from your UConnect paired cellular phone to the UConnect system or vice versa press the Voice Recognition button and say Transfer Call Connect or Disconnect Link Between the UConnect System and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Blue tooth connection between a UConnect paired cellular phone and the UConnect system then follow the in struction described in your cellular phone user s manual 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x List Paired Cellular Phone Names Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing When prompted say List Phones The UConnect system will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the Voice Recogni tion button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sections for an alternate way to select or delete a paired phone Select another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the UConnect system Pre
184. emperature gauge Vehicles equipped with steering wheel mounted buttons described in this section are also equipped with the EVIC The EVIC consists of the following System Status Vehicle information warning message displays Tire Pressure Monitor System If Equipped Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Compass display Outside temperature display Trip computer functions UConnect hands free communication system dis plays If Equipped Navigation system screens If Equipped Audio mode display INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 185 The system allows the driver to select information by pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel gt Press and release the MENU button and the mode displayed will change between Trip Functions Navigation if equipped System Status Personal Settings and Telephone if equipped Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to accept a selection Also the FUNCTION SELECT but ton changes the current CD track being played if so equipped when the EVIC is in the Compass Temp Audio screen Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip Functions Navigation if equipped System Status Messages and Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features 186 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se QD Press and release the COMPASS TEMPERATURE button to display one of eight compass readings and the outside temperature Electronic Vehicle Information Center
185. en more quickly Only use these intermittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accesso ries still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a Rear Power Outlet sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 POWER INVERTER Press the switch located in the center stack lower switch There is a 110 volt 150 watt inverter outlet located on bank to turn the power on to the outlet Press the switch the back of the center console to convert DC current to again to turn the power off AC current This outlet can be used to power small NOTE When the Inverter Switch is pressed there will appliances and electronics be a delay of approximately 1 second before the inverter Be status indicator turns ON The status indicator of the AC power inverter indicates whether the inverter is produc ing AC power 110 Volt AC 150 Watt maximum power outlet 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M f To Avoid Serious Injury or Death Do not use a 3 Prong Adaptor Do not insert any objects into the receptacles Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shoc
186. er for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information Book for additional warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocar bon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Pro tection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified fr DaimlerChrysler Dealership 364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill U
187. er is a base cluster no separate compass temperature display press the button a third time for outside Ambient Temperature on the odometer display Press and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles or kilome ters The odometer must be in trip mode to reset Press this button to view the compass display if equipped Refer to Compass Trip Computer in this section 30 Compass Trip Computer or Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display If Equipped When the appropriate conditions exist this display shows the Compass Trip Computer or Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC messages 180 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se COMPASS AND TRIP COMPUTER IF EQUIPPED The Compass Trip Computer features a driver interactive display displays information on outside tem perature compass direction and trip information It is located on the lower left part of the cluster below the fuel and engine temperature gauge and the tachometer Compass Trip Computer Display The compass trip computer when the appropriate con ditions exist will show the following messages in the odometer display e Door Ajar door e Lift Gate Ajar gATE en INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 181 e Loose Fuel Cap gASCAP These messages can be manually turned off by pressing the right button on the instrument cluster Control Buttons Press and release the odometer trip odometer reset but ton righ
188. eral Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation STEERING WHEEL LOCK IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive steering wheel lock manual transmission only This lock pre vents steering the vehicle without the ignition key If the steering wheel is moved a half turn in either direction and the key is not in the ignition the steering wheel will lock To Manually Lock the Steering Wheel With the engine running rotate the steering wheel 1 2 revolution from straight ahead position turn off the engine and remove the key Rotate the steering wheel slightly in both directions until the lock engages 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se To Release the Steering Wheel Lock Insert the key in the ignition and turn the wheel slightly to the right or left to disengage the lock NOTE If you turned the wheel to the right to engage the lock you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to disengage it If you turned the wheel to the left to engage the lock turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system monitors the vehicle doors liftgate and ignition for unauthorized
189. es have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off road applications Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional 2 wheel drive vehicles any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off road conditions If at all possible avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover OFF ROAD DRIVING TIPS When To Use 4L or 4LO Low Range When off road driving shift to 4L or 4LO for additional traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain ascending or descending steep hills and to increase low speed pulling power This range should be limited to extreme situations such as deep snow mud or sand where additional low speed pulling power is needed Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph 40 km h should be avoided when in 4L or 4LO range Driving Through Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through water there are a number of precautions that must be considered before entering the water en STARTING AND OPERATING 269 CAUTION When driving through water do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h Always
190. ext listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM or FM frequencies pausing for 5 seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time Voice Recognition System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped in section 3 of this manual for detailed operating instruc tions Voice Recognition Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hand Free Phone UCon nect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Com munication UConnect in Section 3 for more informa tion If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UCon nect message will display on the radio screen Phone Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hand Free Phone UCon nect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Com munication UConnect in Section 3 for more informa tion If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not
191. f Equipped 231 166 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS SS INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 1 Air Outlet 2 Instrument Cluster 3 Storage Tray 4 Center Air Outlet 5 Radio 6 Glove Box 7 Climate Control 8 Heated Seat Switch 9 Rear Park Assist Switch 10 Passenger Airbag Disable Light 81c8724e 11 Hazard Warning Flasher 12 Electronic Stability Control Traction Control Switch 13 Cigar Lighter Power Outlet 14 Storage Bin If Equipped INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 167 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ESP TOW BAS HAUL p 26 819788a4 168 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION 1 Fuel Gauge The fuel gauge shows level of fuel in tank when ignition switch is in the ON position 2 Fuel Cap Indicator This symbol indicates the side of the vehicle where the fuel cap is located 3 Temperature Gauge E The temperature gauge indicates engine coolant see temperature Any reading within the normal range indicates that the cooling system is operat ing satisfactorily The gauge needle will likely indicate a high temperature when driving in hot weather up moun tain grades in heavy traffic or when towing a trailer If the needle rises to the H mark stop the vehicle shift into N Neutral increase engine speed for 2 3 minutes If the temperature reading does
192. f severe or fatal injury In fact the U S government notes that the universal use of existing seat INTRODUCTION 5 belts could cut the highway death toll by 10 000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by 2 million annually In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Always buckle up HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the table of contents to determine which section contains the information you desire The detailed index at the rear of this manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this owner manual 6 INTRODUCTION ym Na m l o ESP an 4 ej BAS t ELECTRONIC STABILITY WATERIN FUEL REARWINDOW WINDSHIELD WIPER EXTERIOR BULA HIGH BEAM TURN SIGNALS UPPER AIR HEATED SEAT DOOR LOCK ADJUSTABLE ELECTRONIC PROGRAM BRAKE WIPER INTERMITTENT FAILURE OUTLET Low PEDALS SPEED CONTROL ASSIST SYSTEM BRAKE g 3 d 9 l A O 1 cz T BRAKE SYSTEM FUEL REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD MASTERLIGHTING LOW BEAM KEY ACTIVATE UPPERANDLOWER HEATEDSEAT WINDOWLIFT TIRE PRESSURE HILLDESCENT WARNING PARKING INTERMITTENT WIPER WASHER SWITCH POWER OUTLET AIR OUTLET HIGH MONITOR CONTROL BRAKE S CIO y scan Z lt AWD 1 d Cv T FUELFILLSIDE REARWINDOW WINDSHIELD W
193. f tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your dealer for service assistance The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon mH monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle 310 STARTING AND OPERATING ME e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte nance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open e Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and othe
194. fication Number TIN Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Bl Tires General Information Tue Pressure canada wr EGER Tire Inflation Pressures Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation Radial Ply Tires ee STARTING AND OPERATING 243 TDreSpinning sae ce ace Pa RR RU Res 290 Tread Wear Indicators 5 291 Life Of TIIE Lia cda examen o ree tet ee 292 Replacement Tires os neser llle 292 Alignment And Balance 293 la Tire Chains 2 2ss otro Re 294 Bi Tire Rotation Recommendations 295 li Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS It Equipped i scbes reneadi nEn EnEn 296 Base System If Equipped 299 Premium System If Equipped 301 General Information 05 305 Mi Fuel Requirements 00000 306 3 7L Engine If Equipped 306 4 0L Engine If Equipped 306 Reformulated Gasoline 307 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 307 MMT In Gasoline 0 00000 308 Materials Added To Fuel 308 Fuel System Cautions Carbon Monoxide Warnings 309 MW Adding Fuel 2o re 310 Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap sss 310 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 312 li Vehicle Loading 4o as 313
195. for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing e For each feature explanation in this section only the combined form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the combined form voice com mand Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the UConnect system works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to some one sitting eight feet away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree at the end of this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The UConnect system will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To activate the UConnect system from idle simply press the Phone button and follow audible prompts for directions All UConnect system sessions begin with a press of the Phone button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the m
196. ftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE Vehicles with Full Size Spare 1 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be moni tored by the TPMS 2 If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON 3 Driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h will turn off the TPM Telltale Light as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires ee STARTING AND OPERATING 301 NOTE Vehicles with Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will
197. fting between a forward gear and reverse do not spin wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result Recommended Manual Transmission Shifting Speeds The manufacturer recommends that you use the shift speeds listed in the chart below Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH KM H En Speeds 1 to 2 2to3 3to4 4to5 5to6 gine 37L Accel 15 24 24 34 55 47 56 39 76 90 Cruise 10 16 19 27 43 37 41 31 60 66 Recommended Manual Transmission Downshifting Speeds To prevent clutch and transmission damage your vehicle should be downshifted at speeds no greater than those listed in the chart below Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds in MPH KM H Gear 6thto 5thto 4th to 3rd to 2nd to Selec 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st tion Maxi 85 mph 75 mph 55 mph 35 mph 20 mph mum 135 122 88 56 32 Speed km h km h km h km h km h 252 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed Failure to follow the recommended downshifting speeds may cause the engine to over speed and or damage the clutch disc even if the clutch pedal is depressed e Shift into P Park only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop Shift into or out of R Reverse only after the vehicle has com
198. fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS DRIVER AIRBAG PASSENGER AIRBAG 81b10b53 Front Airbag Components This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and right front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s front airbag is mounted in the steering wheel The passenger side airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers NOTE The front airbags are certified to the Federal regulations that allow less forceful deployment The front airbags have a multistage inflator design This may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity and occupant size Also the front passenger airbag is certified to the Federal regulations that
199. fy an advanced airbag system for persons with disabilities contact your authorized dealer e Comes on for any perio d of time while driving Do not place or hang any items such as add on video players on the right front passenger seat back The additional weight may cause the Occupant Classification System to be unable to correctly classify the right front occupant This could allow the passenger frontal airbag to inflate when it is not desired It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an accident your vehicle is designed to record up to 5 seconds of specific vehicle data parameters see the following list in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment or near deployment and up to a quarter second of high speed deceleration data during and or after air bag deployment or near deployment EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and are otherwise unavail able NOTE e A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually in dicative of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment e Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power In conjunction with other data gathered during a
200. g Flashers 334 Milf Your Engine Overheats 335 H Jacking And Tire Changing 336 Jack Location eia teres c ER ERR 336 Spare TireStowage 0000000 337 Spare Tire Removal 00 0 337 Preparations For Jacking 338 Jacking Instructions 004 339 la jump Starting osos eR ache lll Towing A Disabled Vehicle Two Wheel Drive Vehicles 344 Four Wheel Drive Vehicles 344 334 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS Your vehicle s hazard warning flasher is an emergency warning system When you activate it all front and rear directional signals will flash intermittently Use it when your vehicle is disabled on or near the road It warns other drivers to steer clear of you and your vehicle This is an emergency warning system not to be used when the vehicle is in motion To activate the warning flashers press the button on the lower switch bank below the climate controls To turn the warning flashers off press the button again Hazard Warning Switch NOTE With extended use the flasher may wear down your battery E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 335 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways Slow down e In city
201. g in the 4WD LOCK position on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline compo nents NOTE Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the transfer case Proper operation of 4 wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the transfer case Since 4 wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit Shifting Procedure Electronically Shifted Transfer Case NOTE If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case position have not been met the transfer case will not shift The 4WD Indicator Light located in the display under the tachometer will flash until all the requirements for the selected position have been met To retry a shift return the control knob back to the original position make certain all shift requirements have been met wait five 5 seconds and try the shift again 2WDs 4WD LOCK Rotate the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position Shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK can be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion With the vehicle in motion the transfer case will engage disengage faster if ee STARTING AND OPERATING 267 you momentarily release the acceler
202. ght Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi 193 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value 298 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE CAUTION e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when us ing replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tir
203. he Calibration Mode manually as follows 1 Turn on the ignition switch 2 Press the MENU button until Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features menu is reached 3 Press the SCROLL button until Calibrate Compass is displayed in the EVIC 4 Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to start the calibration The CAL indicator will be dis played in the EVIC 5 Complete one or more 360 turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic North and Geographic North In some areas of the country the difference between magnetic and geographic North is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings For the most accurate compass performance the compass variance must be set using the following procedure NOTE Magnetic materials should be kept away from the top of the right rear quarter window This is where the compass sensor is located INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 191 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 2 Press and hold the compass button for approximately 2 seconds 3 Press the SCROLL button until Compass Variance message and the last variance zone number displays in the EVIC p 4 Press and release FUNCTION SELECT button until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map 5 Press and release the compass b
204. he child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now avail able However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 having attachments for those anchorages will continue to also have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail able for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retro fit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child re straint in any vehicle The two outboard rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats having flexible webbing mounted lower attachments Child seats with fixed lower attach ments must be installed in the outboard positions only Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment NEVER install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle
205. he engine for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating condi tions Do not allow vehicle to run out of fuel NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361 Crankcase Emission Control System Proper operation of this system depends on freedom from sticking or plugging due to deposits As vehicle mileage builds up the PCV valve and passages may accumulate deposits If a valve is not working properly replace it with a new valve DO NOT ATTEMPT TO CLEAN THE OLD PCV VALVE Check ventilation hose for indication of damage or plugging deposits Replace if necessary Fuel Filter A plugged fuel filter can cause hard starting or limit the speed at which a vehicle can be driven Should an excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the fuel tank frequent replacement of the fuel filter which is mounted in the fuel tank may be necessary Engine Air Cleaner Filter Under normal driving conditions replace the air filter at the intervals shown on Maintenance Schedule A If however you drive the vehicle frequently under dusty or severe conditions the filter element should be inspected periodically and replaced if necessary at the intervals shown on Maintenance Schedule B WARNING The air cleaner can provide protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air cleaner unless it is necessary
206. he passenger front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 e The Occupant Classification Module OCM is lo cated beneath the front passenger seat The OCM classifies the occupant into categories based on the measurements made by the seat weight sensors The OCM communicates with the Occupant Restraint Con trol ORC Module The ORC uses the occupant cat egory to determine whether the front passenger airbag should be turned off It also determines the rate of airbag inflation during a collision e Your vehicle has four Weight Sensors located between the seat and the floor pan The weight sensors measure applied weight and transfers that information to the OCM The Side Impact SRS Side Curtain Airbags are de signed to activate only in certain side collisions and rollover events When the ORC detects a collision requiring the side curtain airbag to inflate it signals the inflators on the crash side of the vehicle A quantity 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain airbag The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The airbag inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time it takes to blink your eyes with enough force
207. he vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading sec tion of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWR s for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWR s vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to the Vehicle Loading section of this manual To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if
208. hecked by an authorized dealer 23 Tachometer This gauge measures engine revolutions per minute rpm x 1000 ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 175 24 Transmission Range Indicator The electronic gear selector display is self contained within the instrument cluster It displays the position of the automatic transmission shift lever and the relation of each position to all other positions For a good signal the display will place a box around the selected transmission range PRND21 If the PRNDL displays only the char acters PRND21 no boxes have the system checked by an authorized dealer 25 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light If Equipped Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accord ingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pres
209. hicle 2 Pull the release strap toward the front of the vehicle Raise the seatback and lock it into place If interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully locking you will have difficulty returning the seat to its proper position WARNING Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback in not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly Rear Seat Release Strap latched seat could cause serious injury 3 Fold the rear seat completely forward ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD Then push the safety latch lever to the right It is located To open the hood two latches must be released First pull between the grille and hood opening left of the center the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel 8191daae Underhood Safety Latch Hood Release Lever 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Use a firm downward push at the center front edge of the hood to ensure that both latches engage Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged NOTE Ensure hood prop rod is fully seated into clip before closing hood to prevent damage to grille WARNING If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when
210. hicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESP cannot prevent accidents in cluding those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others The ESP system has 2 available operating modes in 2WD 4WD Part Time 4WD Full Time and on 2WD vehicles 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se ESP On This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 2WD 4WD Part Time 4WD Full Time and on 2WD vehicles When ever the vehicle is started the ESP system will be in this mode This mode should be used for most all driving situations ESP should only be turned off for specific reasons as noted below Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF switch located in the center stack lower switch bank When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESP except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESP TCS Indicator Light will be illuminated All other stability features of ESP function normally This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESP would normally allow i
211. hicle by pressing the Lock button on the key fob 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the Lock button on the key fob while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the Unlock button to deactivate the Security Alarm Flash Lights with Lock The feature will cause the parking lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e On electronic vehicle information center EVIC equipped vehicles refer to Flash Lights with Lock under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual e On non EVIC equipped vehicles perform the follow ing steps ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 1 Press and hold the Unlock button on a programmed i e functional key fob for at least 4 seconds but not longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the Lock button while still holding the Unlock button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature from outside the vehicle by pressing the Lock and Unlock buttons on the key fob 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE
212. ication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Materials Added To Engine Oils The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and it s performance may be impaired by supplemental addi tives Disposing of Used Engine Oil Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil from your vehicle Used oil indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change NOTE For best access to the oil filter a drive on hoist should be used instead of a chassis hoist 3 7L Only 358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Engine Oil Filter Selection All of the manufacturer s engines have a full flow type disposable oil filter Use a filter of this type for replace ment The quality of replacement filters varies consider ably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service Mopar engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended Drive Belts Check Condition and Tension Belt tension is controlled by means of an automatic tensioner No belt tension adjustments are required However belt and belt tensioner condit
213. ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio LOAD Button Loading Compact Disc s Press the LOAD button and the push button with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 inch 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 207 Eject Button Ejecting Compact Disc s Press the eject button and the push button with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the eject button for 5 seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF SEEK Button CD MODE Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will
214. ill be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the far end a call on 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The UConnect system will call the last number that was dialed on your cellular phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the UConnect system Call Continuation Call continuation is progression of a phone call on UConnect system after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to off Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types e After ignition key is switched off a call can continue on the UConnect system either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the UConnect system and transfer of the call to the mobile phone After ignition key is switched to off a call can continue on the UConnect system for certain duration after which the call is automatically transferred from the UConnect system to the mobile phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off es UNDERSTANDING THE F
215. improve the accu racy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 400 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM Once a Month At Each Oil Change e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or e Change the engine oil filter damage e Inspect the brake hoses and lines e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required e Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir brake CAUTION master cylinder power steering and transmission and add as needed Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle e Check the manual transmission fluid level e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 401 Required Maintenance Intervals Perform Maintenance Every Where time and mileage are listed follow the interval that occurs first M A N T E N Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 6 000 10 000 6 6 Rotate tires 6 000 10 000 6 E If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty S or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner 12 000 20 000 12 C filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings re
216. in components steering and sus pension Retighten them if required and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual e Check for accumulations of plants or brush These things could be a fire hazard They might hide damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts 272 STARTING AND OPERATING ME e After extended operation in mud sand water or If you experience unusual vibration after driving in similar dirty conditions have brake rotors wheels mud slush or similar conditions check the wheels for brake linings and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as impacted material Impacted material can cause a soon as possible wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation WARNING PARKING BRAKE Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause To set the parking brake pull the lever up as firmly as excessive wear or unpredictable braking You might possible When the parking brake is applied with the not have full braking power when you need it to ignition ON the Brake Warning Light in the instru prevent an accident If you have been operating your ment cluster will light To release the parking brake pull vehicle in dirty conditions get your brakes checked up slightly press the center button then lower the lever and cleaned as necessary completely ee STARTING AND OPERATING 273 NOTE The instrument cluster Brake Warning Light Be sure the parking
217. indicate the EC battery strength of the UConnect phone Battery Strength INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 193 The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that a phone connection has been made Call in Progress The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that the Connect phone is currently not available mm Phone Not Avail able Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set tings displays in the EVIC 194 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS See Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following choices Language When in this display you may select one of five lan guages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Press the FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to select English Espanol or Francais Then as you con tinue the information will display in the selected lan guage NOTE The EVIC will not change the UConnect language selection Please refer to Language Selection in the HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION UConnect section of this manual for details Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph 24 km h When ON is selected all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until
218. ine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect for tread cuts or sidewall cracks Check wheel nuts for tightness and tires includ ing spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of all exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS la Mirrors uz ERE SOR oe E e Inside Day Night Mirror Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped Outside Mirrors Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature Power Remote Control Mirrors Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped Bl Hands Free Communication UConnect It Equipped costes vesc tine tant RU X acsi Operations swine a o A RUN oen es 89 Phone Call Features llle 96 UConnect System Features 99 Advanced Phone Connectivity 103 Things You Should Know About Your UConnect System 105 General Information 113 MM seats sie e ne ean TETTE T 113 Front Manual Seat Adjustment
219. iner only when the vehicle is parked 6 Way Driver s Power Seat with Manual Recliner The seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat near the floor Use this switch to move the seat up or down forward or rearward or to tilt the seat Power Seat Switches This seat also has a manual recline lever located just to the rear of the power seat switch Pull up on the lever to recline the seat 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat The front passenger seat can be folded flat to allow for extended cargo space Pull up on the lever to fold down the seat back Fold Flat Passenger Seat Head Restraints Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in the event of impact from the rear Adjustable head restraints should be adjusted so that the upper edge is as high as practical The head restraints have a locking button that must be pushed inward to lower the head restraint The head restraints may be raised without pushing in the button Heated Seats If Equipped Heated seats provide comfort and warmth on cold days and can help soothe sore muscles and backs The heaters provide the same heat level for both cushion and back The front driver and passenger seats are heated The controls for each heater are located near the bottom center of the instrument panel After turning on the ignition you can choose from High Low or Off heat settings Amber LEDs in the top p
220. inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consump tion 3 Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Both under inflation and over inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredict able steering response Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on either the face of the driver s door or the driver s side B pillar x 811adOdO Tire Placard Location The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to es STARTING AND OPERATING 289 check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap if equipped This will prevent
221. ing System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time put transmission in neutral and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily refer to Cooling System Operating information in the Maintenance section of this manual for more informa tion RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing 2WD Models Recreational towing all four wheels on the ground Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the driveshaft is removed Towing with the rear wheels on the ground while the driveshaft is connected can result in severe transmission damage NOTE This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground ee STARTING AND OPERATING 331 Towing 4WD or All Wheel Drive Models CAUTION Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational towing Recreational towing all four wheels on the ground Recreational towing is NOT allowed These models do not have a N Neutral position in the transfer case NOTE This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS Bl Hazard Warnin
222. ion selector is in D Drive e the engine coolant has reached normal operating tem perature e vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph 48 km h e transmission has reached normal operating tempera ture NOTE If the vehicle is started in extremely cold tem peratures the transmission may not shift into Overdrive and will automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature Normal operation will resume when the transmission fluid temperature has risen to a suitable level Refer also to the Note under torque converter clutch later in this section During cold temperature operation you may notice delayed upshifts depending on engine and transmission temperature This feature improves the warm up time of the engine and transmission During cold temperature operation the transmission may not downshift from 2nd 2 gear to Ist 1 gear after the initial 1st 1 to 2nd 2 gear upshift Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored for abnormal condi tions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage the transmission limp home mode will be engaged In this mode the transmission will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop To reset the transmission use the following procedure 264 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Move the shift lever to the P Park position 3 Turn off the engine be sure to turn the
223. ion should be inspected at the specified intervals and replaced if re quired See your authorized dealer for service At the mileage indicated in the appropriate Mainte nance Schedule all belts and tensioner should be checked for condition Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure Belts should be inspected for evidence of cuts cracks glazing or frayed cords and replaced if there is indication of damage which could result in belt failure Low gen erator belt tension can cause battery failure Also check belt routing to make sure there is no interfer ence between the belts and other engine components Spark Plugs Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor mance and emission control New plugs should be in stalled at the mileage specified in the appropriate main tenance chart The entire set should be replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark plug Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label in the engine compartment for spark plug information ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359 The catalytic conver The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel CAU HONI only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the converter as an emission control device Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con the event of engine malfunction partic
224. ion switch is turned ON Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESP System will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESP activation GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle s battery 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The HomeLink buttons that are located in the headliner WARNING or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink ENING channels Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety information or assistance 81cb44fe HomeLink Buttons NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is activ
225. ire the airbags to inflate The front airbag inflators are designed to provide different rates of airbag inflation from direction provided by the ORC The ORC may also modify the rate of inflation based on the occupant size provided by the Occupant Classification Module The ORC will detect roll over but not rear impacts The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions These include all of the items listed above except the instrument panel and the steering wheel and column If the key is in the LOCK position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and will not inflate Also the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning 9 Light and PAD Indicator Light for 6 to 8 N seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off The PAD Indicator Light will function normally Refer to Pas senger Airbag Disable PAD Indicator Light in this section If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial start up ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 WARNING Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect yo
226. irst call will be on hold while ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls To combine two calls refer to Conference Call Place Retrieve a Call from Hold To put a call on hold press the Phone button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the Phone button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at one time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the Phone button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the Voice Recogni tion button while a callis in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call while Current Call in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the Phone button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the Phone button Only the active call s w
227. is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri cation or oil change Replace as required Cooling System WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot antifreeze coolant or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood don t open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot Engine Coolant Checks Check antifreeze coolant protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If antifreeze coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh antifreeze coolant Check the front of the A C condenser if equipped or radiator for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367 garden hose vertically down the face of the A C con denser if equipped or the back of the radiator core Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator Inspect the enti
228. itch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position for at least 3 seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Then turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first key 3 Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 15 seconds After ten seconds a chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key 4 Inserta blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will stop flashing To indicate that programming is complete the indicator light will turn on again for 3 seconds and then turn off ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 The new Sentry Key is programmed The Keyless Entry Transmitter will also be programmed during this pro cedure Repeat this procedure to program up to 8 keys If you do not have a programmed sentry key contact your dealer for details NOTE If a programmed key is lost see your dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the systems memory This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be repro grammed All vehicle keys must be taken to the dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed Gen
229. ize The tire size on the Label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Loading The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over front and rear axle Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front ee STARTING AND OPERATING 315 or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR If so weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations
230. k button while you press and release every two seconds cycle your hand held transmitter until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section Using HomeLink To operate simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device ie garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button To re program a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 3 Without releasing the button proceed with PRO GRAMMING HOMELINK Step 2 and follow all re maining steps Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased The H
231. k and failure Power Inverter Switch NOTE Due to build in overload protection the inverter will shut down if the power rating is exceeded es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 CUP HOLDERS The rear passengers have cup holders at the rear of the In the center console there are two cup holders for the center console front seat passengers eo Rear Cup Holders Front Cup Holders 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M STORAGE Console Storage Compartment To open press the latch and lift the cover Front Storage Compartment The front storage compartment located on the left side of the instrument panel can hold cell phones PDA s and other small items Center Console Front Storage Compartment es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 The center console has a removable storage tray which CARGO AREA FEATURES can hold cell phones PDA s and other small items Cargo Light The cargo area light is activated by opening the liftgate opening any door or by rotating the dimmer control on the multi function control lever to the extreme top posi tion Cargo Tie Down Hooks The tie downs located on cargo area floor should be used to safely secure loads when vehicle is moving WARNING Cargo tie down hooks are not safe anchors for a child Removable Storage Tray seat tether strap In a sudden stop or collision a hook could pull loose and allow the child seat to come
232. l HVAC M17 15 Amp Left Tail License ATC Rear View Blue Park Lamp LT TAIL ed Aes VW MIR LIC PRK LMP abin Compartment A Node CCN Transfer MNS 5 Amp re mo a all Case Switch T CASE E vi PRK RUN LMP SW RUN ST Multi Function Control M19 25 Amp Auto Shut Down Natural ASD 1 and 2 386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse M20 15 Amp Cabin Compartment M25 20 Amp Fuel Pump FUEL Blue Node Interior Light Yellow PUMP Diesel Lift CCN INT LIGHT Pump DSL LIFT Switch Bank SW PUMP Export BANK Steering Con Only trol Module SCM M26 10 Amp Power Mirror Switch M21 20 Amp _ Auto Shut Down Red PWR MIRR SW Yellow ASD 3 Driver Window M22 10 Amp Right Horn RT Switch DRVR WIND Red HORN HI LOW SW M23 10Amp Left Horn LT HORN M27 10 Amp Ignition Switch IGN Red HI LOW Red SW Window Module M24 25 Amp Rear Wiper REAR N MORI Natural WIPER M28 10 Amp Next Generation Con Red troller NGC Trans mission Feed TRANS FEED J1962 es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse M29 10 Amp Occupant Classifica M34 10 Amp Park Assist PRK Red tion Module OCM Red ASST Heater Venti M30 15 A
233. l Towing in Section 5 and Towing a Disabled Vehicle in Section 6 of this manual D Drive The transmission automatically upshifts through fifth gear The D Drive position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions Electronic Range Select ERS Operation The Electronic Range Select ERS shift control allows you to move the shifter left or right when the shifter is in the D Drive position allowing the selection of the desired top gear For example if the driver shifts the transmission into 3 third gear the transmission will never shift above third gear but can shift down to 2 second or 1 first when needed WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid Screen Display 1 2 3 4 D Actual Gear s Al 1 12 13 1 4 1 5 lowed NOTE To select the proper gear position for maximum deceleration engine braking move the shift lever to the left D and hold it there The transmission will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down en STARTING AND OPERATING 263 Overdrive Operation The overdrive automatic transmission contains an elec tronically controlled 5th speed Overdrive The trans mission will automatically shift from 4th gear to Over drive if the following conditions are present e the transmiss
234. l also sound a chime In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for 3 seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received 81826bd7 If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash and the CHECK TPM SYS TEM message will no longer display and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes A system fault can occur due to any of the following 304 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE Vehicles with Full Size Spare 1 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be moni tored by the TPMS 2 If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON In addition the EVIC will display a Low Pressure message and a graphic showing
235. l and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warning Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell tale Light illuminates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off ee STARTING AND OPERATING 297 once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information For example your vehicle may have a recom mended cold parked for more than 3 hours placard pressure of 33 psi 227 kPa If the ambient tempera ture is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi 193 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi 165 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale li
236. l when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of the safe zone on these engines ADD OIL MARK FULL RANGE MARK 4X 80c0715e ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355 CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil Road conditions as well as your kind of driving affect the interval at which your oil should be changed Check the following to determine if any apply to you e Day or night temperatures are below 32 F 0 C e Stop and go driving e Extensive engine idling e Driving in dusty conditions e Short trip driving of less than 10 miles 16 2 km e More than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C e Taxi Police or delivery service commercial service e Trailer towing e If equipped for and operating with E 85 ethanol fuel If ANY of these apply to you then change your engine oil at every interval shown in schedule B of the Mainte nance Schedules section of this manual If none of these apply to you then change your engine oil at every interval shown on schedule A of the Main tenance Schedules section of this manual NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change in tervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or 6 months whichever comes first 356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Engine Oil Selection For best perf
237. lar phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority 3 and priority 5 phones are present in the vehicle the UConnect system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 System will prompt you to say the number you want call For example you can say 234 567 8901 The phone number that you enter must be of valid length and combination Based on the country in which the ve hicle was purchased the UConnect limits the user from dialing invalid combination of numbers For example in USA 234 567 890 is nine digits long which is not a valid USA phone number the closest valid phone number has ten digits The UConnect system will confirm the phone num ber and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Dial by Saying a Number Call by Saying a Name e Press the Phone button to begin e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M System will prompt you to say the name of the person you want call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to c
238. lation procedures 326 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Also check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is pressures before trailer usage required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to the Tires General Information section of this manual on Tread Wear Indicators for the proper inspection procedure Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 When replacing tires refer to the Tires General Infor me sa and required for trailere excess 052 000 mation section of this manual on Replacement Tires for 8 proper tire replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase i the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 454 kg Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes loaded it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury ee STARTING AND OPE
239. ld be done when ever the brake system is serviced and every engine oil change ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373 WARNING Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure You could have an accident If you see any signs of cracking scuffing or worn spots have the brake hoses replaced immediately Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked when performing under hood services or immediately if the BRAKE warning light shows system failure Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap If necessary add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type WARNING e Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial boiling point or unidentified as to specification may result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking You could have an accident e Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire 374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly clos
240. lected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Delay Turning Headlights Off When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until 0 30 60 or 90 appears Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until OFF 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit When this feature is selected the power window switches radio hands free system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Off 45 sec 5 min or 10 min appears 196 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS See Confirmation of Voice Commands If Equipped When ON is selected all voice commands from the UConnect system are confirmed To m
241. lfunction lamp for the ESP is combined ESP with BAS The yellow ESP BAS Warning Lamp and the yellow ESP TCS Indicator Light in the instrument cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warning Lamp comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system If this light remains on ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 171 after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible NOTE The ESP TCS Indicator Light and the ESP BAS Warning Lamp come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is actively operating 11 TOW HAUL Indicator Light If Equipped The TOW HAUL button is located on the gear shift bezel This light will illuminate when the TOW HAUL button has been selected TOW HAUL 12 Turn Signal Indicator Light When a turn signal is activated a right pointing or left pointing arrow lights up and flashes to indicate the direction of the turn These indicators also indicate proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights If either indicator flashes at a faster rate than normal check for a defective bulb If either indicator fails to light up
242. lied and the engine is running manual transmission only The BRAKE warning light will remain on steady with the park brake on and the shifter in the P Park position If shifted out of P Park it will begin to flash automatic transmission only If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary Operating the vehicle in this condition is danger ous 15 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Warning Light If Equipped This light informs you of a problem with the A Electronic Throttle Control system If a prob lem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see your dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on for 15 seconds as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer 16 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light Traction Control System TCS Indicator Light The yellow ESP indicator light in the speedom eter area illuminates with the key in the igni tion switch turned to the ON RUN position It should go out with the engine running The ESP TCS Indic
243. limits Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it Except for the second row center seating position all passenger seat belts are equipped with automatic locking retractors identified by a distinctive label The second row center position has a cinching latch plate identified by a distinctive label Both types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt the cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight However any seat belt system may loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary For the second row seat belts with the automatic locking retractors pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull the belt until it is fully extracted from the retractor Allow the belt to return to the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint For additional information refer to Auto matic Locking Mode earlier in this section ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 e In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the e When your chil
244. line blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emission system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not his her gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu lated gasoline Materials Added To Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance ee STARTING AND OPERATING 309 The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance damage the emission control system An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out o
245. ling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after 5 seconds INFO Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for 3 seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for 3 seconds to return to elapsed time display es INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 211 Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 WMA player cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function
246. ll cargo consumables and equipment permanent or temporary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recom mended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale WARNING If the gross trailer weight GTW is 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg or more it is mandatory to use a weight distributing hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle If you use a standard weight carrying hitch you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The gross combination weight rating GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination Note that GCWR ratings in clude a 150 lbs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident es STARTING AND OPERATING 317 Tongue Weight TW The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15
247. loose A child could be badly injured Use only the anchors provided for child seat tethers 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the NORRIS seatback This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision WARNING To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in per sonal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and described on the label attached to the left door or left use seat belts door center pillar Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits e Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put Cargo Load Floor If Equipped heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible The panel in the load floor is reversible for added utility e Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear One side features a plastic lined tray which can hold a axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight variety of items The maximum load capacity of the load over or behind the rear axle can cause the vehicle to floor is 400 Ibs 181 kg sway es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR V
248. ls 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a 3 character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a 3 character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 WMA files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 209 If a disc contains multi formats such as CD audio and mp3 wma tracks the radio will only play the mp3 wma tracks on that disc Supported MP3 WMA File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 WMA extension as MP3 WMA files Non MP3 WMA files named with the MP3 WMA extension may cause play back problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 WMA and will not play the file When using the MP3 WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 WMA file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 WMA files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Specifi Sampling Fre Bit rate kb
249. matically decrease as the engine warms up CAUTION Long periods of engine idling especially at high engine speeds can cause excessive exhaust tempera tures which can damage your vehicle Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the engine running WARNING Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms engine coolant and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord e The engine block heater cord is found under the hood clipped to the heater line on the left side of the engine en STARTING AND OPERATING 249 WARNING Remember to disconnect the cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 volt AC electrical cord could cause electrocution Use the heater when temperatures below 0 F 18 C are expected to last for several days MANUAL TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED 6 Speed Manual Transmission WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the parking brake fully applied The parking brake should al ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle especially on an incline Follow the shift pattern on the gearshift knob NOTE The backup lights will come on when your vehicle is in R Reverse gear
250. mp Rear Wiper Module lation Air Condition Blue RR WIPER MOD ing Module HVAC Power Folding Mirror MOD Headlamp PWR FOLD MIR Wash HDLP WASH M31 20 Amp Back Up Lamps B U Compass SOMES Yellow LAMPS M35 10Amp Heated Mirrors M32 10 Amp Occupant Restraint Red Red Controller ORC TT M36 20 Amp Power Outlet 3 EUROPE Yellow BATT M33 10 Amp Next Generation Con Red troller NGC Global Powertrain Engine Controller GPEC 388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse M37 10Amp Anti Lock Brake Sys Red tem ABS Electronic Stability Program ESP Stop Lamp Switch STP LP SW Fuel Pump Rly Hi Control M38 25 Amp Lock Unlock Motors Natural LOCK UNLOCK MTRS CAUTION e When installing the Integrated Power Module cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module and possibly result in a electrical system failure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389 REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb No Dome
251. n If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a UConnect System Not Available message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button and the time of day will display In AM or FM mode pressing the TIME button will switch between the time and frequency displays Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE control knob Press the TUNE control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait 5 seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the SET HOME CLOCK entry Once in this display follow the above procedure starting at step 2 INFO Button Radio Mode Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only 200 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS ME RW FF Radio Mode Pressing the rewind or fast forward button causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Radio Mode Turn the right side rotary
252. n button for 5 seconds until the session begins or e Press the Voice Recognition button and say Setup Voice Training command Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the UConnect system For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default settings enter the Voice Training session via the above procedure and follow the prompts Voice Recognition VR e For best performance adjust the rear view mirror to provide at least V inch 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting approximately eight 8 feet away from you Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice recognition period Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some
253. n the front wheels raised and the rear wheels on the ground NOTE Towing the vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground at more than 30 mph 50 km h or for more than 15 miles 25 km can cause severe transmission damage If the vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles 25 km or faster than 30 mph it must be towed on a flatbed Rear Wheels Raised The speed must not exceed 30 mph 50 km h and the distance must not exceed 15 miles 25 km This vehicle may be towed with the transmission in N the ignition key in the LOCK position the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the ground If the vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles 25 km or faster than 30 mph it must be towed on a flatbed Four Wheel Drive Vehicles The manufacturer recommends flatbed towing with all wheels OFF the ground MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bl Engine Compartment 3 7L 348 Bl Engine Compartment 4 0L 0 349 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBDII 350 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 351 H Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Programs 2 00243 9a 63 pe RIA Reads 351 Bl Replacement Parts 0000 353 W Dealer Service llle 353 Bl Maintenance Procedures oonan aaau aaau 354 Engine Qil 2i ce creme xe Ree 354 Drive Belts Check Condition And Tension 358 Spark Plugs i e a ea
254. ng Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Max GTW towable for your given drivetrain Trailer Hitch Classification Class Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg 10 000 Ibs 4 540 kg All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle Class I Light Duty Class II Medium Duty Class III Heavy Duty Class IV Extra Heavy Duty 320 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain w Cooler Engine Model GCWR Gross Com Frontal Area Max GTW Tongue Wt Transmission bined Wt Rating Gross Trailer Wt See Note 3 7L 6 Speed 4x2 8 500 Ibs 3 855 kg 40 Sq Ft 3 72 3 500 lbs 1 587 kg 350 lbs 159 kg Manual square meters 3 7L 6 Speed 4x4 8 750 Ibs 3 969 kg 40 Sq Ft 3 72 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg 350 lbs 159 kg Manual square meters 3 7L 4x2 7 150 lbs 3 243 kg 32 Sq Ft 2 97 2 000 lbs 907 kg 200 Ibs 91 kg Automatic square meters 3 7L 4x4 7 400 lbs 3 356 kg 32 Sq Ft 2 97 2 000 lbs 907 kg 200 Ibs 91 kg Automatic square meters 3 7L 4x2 9 850 Ibs 4 468 kg 64 Sq Ft 5 94 3 500 Ibs 1 588 kg 350 lbs 159 kg Automatic w square meters Cooler 3 7L 4x4 10 100 Ibs 4 581 kg 64 Sq Ft 5 94 3 500 Ibs 1 588 kg
255. ng component that may cause heat damage or mechanical wear Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks 372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M are present Components should be replaced immedi ately if there is any evidence of degradation that could cause failure Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the appropriate Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for suggested service intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You wouldn t have your full braking capacity in an emergency Brake and Power Steering System Hoses When servicing the vehicle for scheduled maintenance inspect surface of hoses for evidence of heat and me chanical damage Hard and brittle rubber cracking tears cuts abrasion and excessive swelling suggest deteriora tion of the rubber Particular attention should be made to examining those hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold Inspect all hose clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present NOTE Inspection of brake hoses shou
256. ngue Weights TW and may be required depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration loading to comply with gross axle weight rating GAWR requirements 318 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING EXAMPLE ONLY An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling stability braking per formance and could result in an accident FIG 1 WITHOUT WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION INCORRECT Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information FIG 2 WITH WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION CORRECT suas Weight Distributing Hitch System ee STARTING AND OPERATING 319 EXAMPLE ONLY Kee FIG 3 IMPROPER ADJUSTMENT INCORRECT Improper Adjustment of Weight PM 81232807 Distributing System hdi Trailer Hitch Classification Your vehicle is capable of towing trailers up to 2 000 Ibs 907 kg without added equipment or alterations to the standard equipment Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2 000 Ibs 907 kg with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package See your dealer for package content The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towi
257. nically controlled fourth and fifth speed Overdrive The transmission will automatically shift from 3rd gear to Overdrive if the following conditions are present e the transmission selector is in D Drive e the engine coolant has reached normal operating tem perature e vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph 48 km h e the TOW HAUL button has not been activated e transmission has reached normal operating tempera ture NOTE If the vehicle is started in extremely cold tem peratures the transmission may not shift into Overdrive and will automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature Normal operation will resume when the transmission fluid temperature has risen to a suitable level Refer also to the Note under torque converter clutch later in this section If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot the transmission will automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature If the transmission temperature becomes hot enough the Transmission Temperature Warning Light may illuminate and the transmission may downshift out of Overdrive until the transmission cools down After cooldown the transmis sion will resume normal operation 258 STARTING AND OPERATING ME The transmission will downshift from Overdrive to Drive if the accelerator pedal is fully depressed at vehicle speeds above approximately 35 mph 56 km h When To Use TOW HAUL Mod
258. njured by these fumes Keep the section It tells you how to use your restraint system liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS WARNING Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems These include the front and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers front airbags for both the driver and right front passenger and side curtain airbags for the driver and passengers seated next to a window If you will be carrying children too small for adult size belts your seat belts also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems In a collision you and your passengers can suffer injuries including fatalities if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING e Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat and cause a collision which includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen
259. njury or death Auto Down Feature The driver s and front passenger s if equipped for pas senger side power window switches have an Auto Down feature Press the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automati cally To open the window part way press the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop To stop the window from going all the way down during the auto down operation pull up on the switch briefly For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable For details refer to Delay Power Off to ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features under Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual Auto Up Feature with Anti Pinch Protection If Equipped On some models the driver s power window switch has an Auto Up feature Pull the window switch up to the second detent release
260. now in the automatic locking mode How to Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Disconnect the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic lock ing mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on collision This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly automatic locking retrac tor feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Seat Belt Pretensioners The driver and front passenger seat belts are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove any slack from the seat belt systems in the event of a collision These devices improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight around the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants inclu
261. nt The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate 1 If the key fob is equipped with a screw remove the screw With the key fob buttons facing down use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the key fob case apart Make sure not to damage the seal during removal 7 Separating Case Halves 81182072 ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 2 Remove and replace the batteries Avoid touching the new batteries with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 To assemble the key fob case snap the two halves together NOTE If the key fob is equipped with a screw reinstall and tighten the screw until snug General Information This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with RS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your Keyless Entry Transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 Weak batteries in transmitter The expecte
262. nted Stop Light CHMSL 393 Engines ak ae mor Oe EE Rd oR UR ted 395 Bl Fluid Capacities 0 0 0 0 eee 394 Chassis 4 0 ey REY RD ann E E ERE 396 Bi Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 395 348 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 7L AIR CLEANER ENGINE OIL BRAKE FLUID FUSES INTEGRATED FILTER DIPSTICK RESERVOIR POWER MODULE COOLANT ENGINE OIL COOLANT WASHER BATTERY PRESSURE CAP FILL BOTTLE FLUID BOTTLE 81961ct3 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 349 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 4 0L AIR CLEANER ENGINE OIL BRAKE FLUID FUSES INTEGRATED FILTER DIPSTICK RESERVOIR POWER MODULE COOLANT COOLANT WASHER ENGINE OIL BATTERY PRESSURE CAP BOTTLE FLUID BOTTLE FILL 8192b982 350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivabl
263. o D F In Mexico 915 729 1248 or 729 1240 Outside Mexico 525 729 1248 or 729 1240 408 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDDITTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its Customer Center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for your vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex pected repairs after your manufacturer s new vehicle limited warranty expires The manufacturer stands be hind only the manufacturer s Service Contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s Service Contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about your service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract Na tional Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s Service Contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s Service Contract If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer s Service Contract and
264. o sit in a normal position with their feet on or near the floor in order to be properly classified Reclining the seat back too far may change how an occupant is classified by the OCS Drivers and adult passengers should verify that the PAD Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult is riding in the front passenger seat If an adult occu pant s weight is transferred to another part of the vehicle like the door or instrument panel the weight sensors in the seat may not properly classify the occupant Objects lodged under the seat or between the seat and the center console can prevent the occupant s weight from being measured properly and may result in the occupant being improperly classified Ensure that the front passenger seat back does not touch anything placed on the back seat because this can also affect occupant classification Also if you fold down the rear seat check to be sure it doesn t touch the front passenger seat If the front passenger seat is damaged in any way it should only be serviced by an authorized dealer If the seat is removed or even if the seat attachment bolts are loosened or tightened in any way take the vehicle to an authorized dealer If there is a fault present in the OCS the Airbag Warning Light a red light located in the center of the instrument cluster directly in front of the driver will be turned on This indicates that you should take the vehicle to an authorized dealer
265. o stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle between Artist Song Title and Composer if available information Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional 3 seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows 230 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS ME TUNE Control Rotary Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or counter clockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for 5 seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE control knob within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to be selected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is us
266. o the driver s side door or pillar This label contains the month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front and rear and Vehicle Identification Number VIN A Month Day Hour MDH number is included on this label and indicates the Month Day and Hour of manufacture The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your Vehicle Identification Number VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver passengers vehicle options trailer tongue weight and cargo The label also specifies maxi mum capacities of front and rear axle systems GAWR Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded Payload The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck can carry including the weight of the driver all passengers options and cargo Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded 314 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity axle springs tires or wheels Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for in creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi cle s GVWR Tire S
267. of operation after shifting the transmission into gear may seem sluggish This is due to the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into es STARTING AND OPERATING 265 the transmission This condition is normal and will not cause damage to the transmission The torque converter will refill within five seconds of shifting from Park into any other gear position FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION MP 143 Single Speed Part Time Transfer Case If Equipped Operating Information Precautions This is an electric shift transfer case and is operated by the 4WD Control Switch Transfer Case Switch which is located on the center console This electronically shifted transfer case provides 2 mode positions 2 rear wheel drive high range 2WD and 4 wheel drive high range 4WD LOCK Transfer Case Switch The electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be driven in the 2 wheel drive position 2WD for normal street and highway conditions dry hard surfaced roads When additional traction is required the transfer case 4WD LOCK position can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together and force the front and rear 2660 STARTING AND OPERATING Se wheels to rotate at the same speed This is accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position refer to Shifting Procedure for specific shift ing instructions The 4WD LOCK position is designed for loose slippery road surfaces only Drivin
268. old Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature light is on safely pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle in neutral with the air conditioner turned off until the light turns off If the if the light remains on turn the engine off immediately and call for service 170 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Ses WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Section 7 of this manual Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 7 Speedometer Shows the vehicles speed 8 High Beam Indicator Light E Indicates that headlights are on high beam 9 Security Alarm System Indicator Light If Equipped This light will flash rapidly for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm is arming The light will flash at a slower speed continuously after the alarm is set The security light will also come on for about three seconds when the ignition is first turned on 10 Electronic Stability Program ESP Warning Light Brake Assist System BAS Warning Light If Equipped The ma
269. omeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter e Press the Learn Button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for Rolling Code e Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in ja If you are have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance General Information This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 1 This device may not cause harmful interference POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof switch is located between the sun 2 This devi t t interf that b is device must accept any interference that may be on the overhead console received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi ca
270. on to the UConnect system When this happens the connec tion can generally be re established by switching the phone off on Your cell phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth on mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least five 5 seconds prior to using the system 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Main Menu Redial Towing Emergency En9lish Phonebook edia A e mergenc Espanol oneboo Francais Last Enter Number Number on Phone is redialed See Setup Phonebook Flowchart Flowchart Number associated Number with entry is Dialed is dialed The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones paired are available across all languages Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf7b UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Voice Tree Phonebook New Entry Enter Name Y at a time Enter Location Enter Location Current Number is played Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf80 Phonebook Enter Number New Entry Added 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Setup Setup Confirmation will English Espanol Prompts tempo
271. ons on the key fob 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the Lock button on the key fob while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the Unlock button to deactivate the Security Alarm To Lock the Doors and Liftgate Press and release the Lock button on the key fob to lock all doors and the liftgate If the ignition is OFF when the doors are locked the parking lights will flash once and the horn will chirp once Sound Horn with Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the key fob This feature can be turned on or off To change the current setting proceed as follows e On electronic vehicle information center EVIC equipped vehicles refer to Sound Horn with Lock under Personal Settings Customer Programmable 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual e On non EVIC equipped vehicles perform the follow ing steps 1 Press the Lock button on a programmed i e func tional key fob for at least 4 seconds but not longer than 10 seconds Then press the Panic button while still holding the Lock button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature from outside the ve
272. onsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing antifreeze coolant types will decrease the life of the antifreeze coolant and will require more frequent antifreeze coolant changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of antifreeze coolant and to insure that antifreeze coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant reserve tank The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution Never add antifreeze coolant when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Disposal of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based antifreeze coolant is a regu lated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by animals or 370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se children do not store ethylene glycol based antifreeze coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child cont
273. open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLET This vehicle has two auxiliary power outlets that can provide up to 20 Amps of current for accessories de signed for use with the standard power outlet adapters The front power outlet located in the lower portion of the instrument panel has a snap on plastic cap so that it can be covered when not in use As a safety precaution the outlet in the instrument panel only operates with the ignition switch ON When the optional Cigar Lighter heating element is used it heats when pushed in and pops out automatically when ready for use To preserve the heating element do not hold the lighter in the heating position Front Power Outlet 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The rear power outlet if equipped is located in the left Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off rear cargo area WARNING Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery ev
274. or insert a valid sentry key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position The Security Alarm System is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm If the previously described arming sequence has occurred the system will arm regardless of whether you are inside or outside the vehicle If you remain inside the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the system Manually unlocking the doors with the door lock plunger located on the inside of the doors or the driver s door key lock cylinder will not disarm the system Tamper Alert If something has triggered the alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors Check the vehicle for tampering PN ILLUMINATED ENTRY The interior lights come on when you open any door They will remain on for about 30 seconds after all doors are closed then fade to off The lights also will fade to off if you turn on the ignition after you close all the doors 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate or activate the panic alarm from distances up to 23 feet 7 meters using your key fob The key fob does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system 818e937a Three Button Key Fob NOTE e For the remote starting feature if equippe
275. or normal brake or clutch pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate speed control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning off the ignition switch erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RESUME ACCEL lever up and release Resume can be used at any speed above 25 mph 40 km h To Vary The Speed Setting When the speed control is ON speed can be increased by pushing up and holding RESUME ACCEL Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new speed will be set Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h speed increase Each time the lever is tapped speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph 6 km h etc To decrease speed while speed control is ON push down and hold SET DECEL Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new speed will be set 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Tapping the SET DECEL button once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h speed decrease Each time the button is tapped speed decreases NOTE The Speed Control system has been designed to shut down if multiple speed control switch functions are operated simultaneously in order to ensure proper op eration If this occurs the system can be reactivated by pushing the speed control switch ON OFF button and re setting the desired vehicle SET sp
276. or the system depending on the type of mirror and radio equipped and either the radio or the mirror has the two control buttons Phone Button and Voice Recognition Button that will enable you to access the system Voice Recognition Button Actual button location may vary with radio e The individual buttons are described in the Operation section The UConnect system can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone See UCon nect website for supported phones If your cellular phone supports a different profile e g Headset Profile you may not be able to use any UConnect features Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The UConnect system is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the UConnect system can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the UConnect system such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect system and to navigate through the UConnect menu structure Voice commands are required after most UConnect system prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait
277. ormance and maximum protection for all engines under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Cer tified and meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils Engine Oil Viscosity 3 7L Engine SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low tempera ture starting and vehicle fuel economy Your engine oil filler cap shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Engine Oil Viscosity 4 0L Engine The proper SAE viscosity grade of engine oil should be selected based on the following recommendation and be within the operating temperature shown in the engine oil viscosity chart ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357 ENGINE OIL VISCOSITY CHART 0 10 20 32 60 80 29 48 42 7 0 16 27 Temperature range anticipated before next oil change 809c2ec8 SAE 10W 30 engine oil is preferred SAE 5W 30 engine oil is allowed during cold weather only to improve cold weather starting Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi f
278. ortion of each switch es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 indicate the level of heat in use Two LEDs are illumi nated for high one for low and none for off Pressing the switch once will select high level heating Heated Seat Switches Pressing the switch a second time will select low level heating Pressing the switch a third time will shut the heating elements off When high temperature heating is selected the heaters provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation after heating is activated The heat output then drops to the normal high temperature level If high level heating is selected the system will automati cally switch to the low level after 30 minutes of continu ous operation At that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change Operation on the low setting also turns off automatically after 30 minutes NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat s
279. ossible to prevent component damage 270 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Driving In Snow Mud and Sand In heavy snow when pulling a load or for additional control at slower speeds shift the transmission to a low gear and shift the transfer case to 4L or 4LO if necessary Refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation in this section Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain headway Over revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads be cause engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control Hill Climbing NOTE Before attempting to climb a hill determine the conditions at the crest and or on the other side Before climbing a steep hill shift the transmission to a lower gear and shift the transfer case to 4L or 4LO Use first gear and 4L or 4LO for very steep hills If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brakes Restart the engine and shift to R Reverse Back slowly down the hill allowing the compression braking of the engine to help regulate your speed If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires WARNING If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade never attempt to turn around To do so may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle Al
280. owing steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON or START position The manufacturer does not recom mend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert 1 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and fasten the driver seat belt 2 Start the engine and wait for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off 3 Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle unbuckle and then re buckle the driver seat belt at least three times ending with the seat belt buckled 4 Turn off the engine A single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the pro gramming The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be reacti vated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Warning Light will continue to illuminate while the driver seat belt remains unfastened 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when
281. passenger seat assembly its related compo nents or seat cover may inadvertently change the airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash This could result in death or serious injury to the front seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an acci dent A modified vehicle may not comply with re quired Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards FMVSS If A Deployment Occurs The airbag system is designed to deploy when the Occupant Restraint Control ORC Module detects a moderate to severe frontal collision to help restrain the driver and front passenger and then to immediately deflate NOTE A frontal collision that is not severe enough to need airbag protection will not activate the system This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the
282. place if necessary 12 000 20 000 12 D Inspect the front amp rear axle fluid change if using n your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent 18 000 30 000 18 E trailer towing S Inspect exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 8 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months 2500 see 24 Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot 24 000 40 000 24 seals replace if necessary Replace the engine air cleaner filter 30 000 50 000 30 402 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se Perform Maintenance Every Where time and mileage are listed follow the interval that occurs first Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months Check the PCV valve replace if necessary 30 000 50 000 30 Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service 4 30 000 50 000 30 commercial service off road desert operation or more then 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C Inspect the transfer case fluid 30 000 50 000 30 Replace the spark plugs 3 7L Only 30 000 50 000 30 Change the automatic transmission fluid amp filter if using your vehicle for any of the following police 60 000 100 000 60 M A l N U E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle
283. ploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ERM Electronic Roll Mitigation This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicles speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift it applies the appropriate brake and may reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneu vers ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers It can not prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Many factors such as vehicle loading road condi tions and driving conditions influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur ERM can not prevent all wheel lift or rollovers especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar dize the user s safety or the safety of others ESP Electronic Stability Program This
284. ps cation quency KHz l 320 256 224 192 oii 48 441 32 160 128 112 96 80 y 64 56 48 MPEG 2 Audio 160 128 144 112 Layer 3 26220016 96 86 64 56 45 WMA Specifi cation WMA Sampling Fre quency kHz 44 1 and 48 Bit Rate kbps 48 64 96 128 160 192 VBR ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported 210 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se Playback of MP3 WMA Files When a medium containing MP3 WMA data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 WMA files Loading times for playback of MP3 WMA files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrol
285. r operates in both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the fan switch is not in the A C position This dehumidi fies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary 238 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS M Circulation Control Press the mode control knob to activate the recirculation mode A lamp in the knob will illuminate when you are in recirculate mode Press the knob again to deactivate the system Only use the recircu lation mode to temporarily block out any outside odors smoke or dust and to cool the interior rapidly upon initial start up in very hot or humid weather 8191 f97 NOTE Continuous use of the recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended In cold or damp weather the use of the recirculation mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture build up inside the vehicle For maximum defogging select the Outside Air position NOTE Recirculation mode will not operate in floor mix or defrost modes Air Conditioning Operation Press the temperature control knob to activate the air condi tioning mode A lamp will illuminate when the Air Con ditioning System is engaged Press the knob again to deac tivate the system 8191f9fb NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds
286. r poisonous ex haust gases from entering the vehicle ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap A us The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap driver s side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap has been designed for use with this vehicle 81937590 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 311 CAUTION CAUTION To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling Damage to the fuel system or emission control sys tem could result from using an improper fuel cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system Also a poorly fitting after market cap can cause the MIL Malfunction Indicator NOTE When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the Light to illuminate due to fuel vapors escaping from fuel tank is full the system WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near CAUTION the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank filled A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regula tions and will cause the malfunction indicator light to turn on 312 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE Tighten the gas cap about 1 4 turn until you hear one click This is an indication that cap is properly tightened If the gas cap is no
287. r vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system components 308 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Metha nol MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gaso
288. raints will also be equipped with a tether strap a en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the anchorage bars pushing aside the seat cover material Then locate the tether anchorage directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instruc tions child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinch ing latch plates or automatic locking retractors which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so th
289. rarily or Francais on off Say 4 digit System Lists override pin code Phones Select phone SEE p to be deleted ISP HOUSES P i Enter Name of phone and follow prompts to complete pairing System System Lists All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 819402e4 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s Zero call one cancel two confirmation prompts three continue four delete five dial six download seven edit eight emergency nine English star erase all plus Espanol pound Francais add location help all home 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s language return to main menu return or main menu list names select phone select list phones send mobile set up phone settings or phone mute set up mute off towing assistance new entry transfer call no UConnect Tutorial pager try again pair a phone voice training phone pairing pairing work phonebook phone book yes redial previous record again ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS
290. rdering manuals No P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive service manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations dia grams and charts es F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 411 e Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Call Toll Free at Filled with diagrams charts and detailed illustrations e 1 800 890 4038 U S these practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer acc Aa controlled vehicle systems and features They show Or exactly how to find and correct problems the first time i using step by step troubleshooting and driveability VASTE ADONE PE Worl Wide Neo ae procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list e www techauthority daimlerchrysler com pealtocis and a e www daimlerchrysler ca manuals e Owner s Manuals These manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler group vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance pro cedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips 412 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE
291. re fore if the odometer reading is changed during repair or replacement be sure to keep a record of the reading before and after the service so that the correct mileage can be determined Change Oil Message Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Change Oil message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Trip Odometer button 178 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indica tor system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 27 Malfunction Indicator Light This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system
292. re manufacturing location 2 digits L9 Code representing the tire size 2 digits ABCD Code used by tire manufacturer 1 to 4 digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured 2 digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured 2 digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on either the face of the driver s door or the driver s side B pillar 811adOdO Tire Placard Location STARTING AND OPERATING 283 Tire and Loading Information Placard SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRO THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS NEVER EXCEED XXX KG T125 70D15 420kPa 60PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION RA 4N109268 J 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 the total weight your vehicle can carry 3 the tire size designed for your vehicle 4 the cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires 284 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Loading T
293. re s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the UConnect system Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone the UConnect system will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press Phone button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell phone Press the Phone button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The UConnect system compatible phones in market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only either answer an incoming call or ignore it Making a Second Call while Current Call in Progress To make a second call while you are currently in a call press the Voice Recognition button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phone book entry you wish to call The f
294. re system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of antifreeze coolant from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the antifreeze coolant will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT RE MOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill At the intervals shown in the appropriate Maintenance Schedule the system should be drained flushed and refilled If the solution is dirty and contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of old antifreeze coolant solution Discard old antifreeze coolant solution according to rec ommended procedure Selection Of Engine Coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended antifreeze coolant refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct antifreeze coolant type 368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se CAUTION e Mixing of antifreeze coolant other than the speci fied HOAT antifreeze coolant may result in de creased corrosion protection and engine damage If a non HOAT antifreeze coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the specified antifreeze coolant as soon as possible Do not use
295. rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited DTS DTS and DTS 2 0 are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems Inc es INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 213 SALES CODE RES AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate Ca RND SINGLE DISC MP3 PUSH ON PUSH AUDIO SELECT Q TUNE SCROLL RES Radio 81c7c564 Non Satellite Model Shown With Satellite Similar Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Press the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Press the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played 214 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS ME SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the n
296. roof opening struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the Injury may result 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing press the switch forward and hold This allows the sunroof to move towards the closed position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the V button and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof
297. rvice that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will contact you to supply a welcome kit and to confirm subscription information including the set up of your on line listening account at no additional charge For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Canadian residents Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number 228 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS ME Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ENS SID The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Num ber is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio system To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACCESSORY position and the radio ON press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in 2 minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen Selecting Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the
298. s Warranty service must be done by an authorized Chrysler Dodge or Jeep dealer We strongly recommend that you take your vehicle to your selling dealer They know you and your vehicle best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s dealers have the facilities factory trained ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 407 technicians special tools and the latest information to assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you should always talk to your dealer s service manager first Most matters can be resolved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the dealership They want to know if you need assistance e If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the Manufacturer s Customer Center Any communication to the Manufacturer s Customer Center should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office Dealership name e Vehicle identification number e Vehicle delivery date and mileage DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexic
299. s it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Radio Mode Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Radio Mode Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for 5 seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time Voice Recognition Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hand Free Phone UCon nect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Com munication UConnect in Section 3 for more informa tion If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a UConnect System Not Available message will display on the radio screen ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 199 Phone Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hand Free Phone UCon nect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Com munication UConnect in Section 3 for more informa tio
300. s required to gain traction To turn ESP on again momentarily depress the ESP OFF switch This will restore the normal ESP On mode of operation ESP Off Switch NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESP OFF switch Once the es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 situation requiring ESP to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESP back on by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion ESP BAS Warning Lamp The malfunction indicator lamp for the ESP is combined with BAS The ESP BAS Warning Lamp and the ESP TCS Indicator Light in the instrument cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warning Lamp comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESP TCS Indicator Light and the ESP BAS Warning Lamp come on momentarily each time the ignit
301. s this button to turn on the rear window de froster and the optional elec tric remote control heated mirrors An amber light shows that the defroster is on 8192b72e The defroster will automatically turn off after about ten minutes For five more minutes of operation press the switch again To prevent excessive battery drain use the defroster only when the engine is operating CAUTION Use care when washing the inside of the rear window to prevent damage to heating elements Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Also keep all objects a safe distance from the window to prevent damaging the heating elements 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M ROOF LUGGAGE RACK NON FUNCTIONAL The tie loops provided in the Roof Ditch Applique can be used to help tie down cargo however metal rails crossbars should always be used whenever cargo is placed on the roof Tie loops should not be used on their own to attach luggage to the Roof Ditch Applique The load carried on the roof when equipped with a luggage rack must not exceed 150 Ibs 68 kg and it should be uniformly distributed over the cargo area Check the straps frequently to be sure that the load remains securely attached NOTE Metal rails crossbars are offered by Mopar accessories See your authorized dealer External racks do not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle Be sure tha
302. scroll up and down the menu If Equipped e DISC Play Pause You can toggle between Il playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT button If Equipped e DVD Play Options Selecting the DVD Play Options will display the following e Subtitle Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will switch subtitles to different subtitle languages that are available on the disc If Equipped e Audio Stream Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will switch to different audio languages if supported on the disc If Equipped ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 203 e Angle Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will change the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc If Equipped NOTE The available selections for each of the above entries varies depending upon the disc NOTE These selections can only be made while playing a DVD e VES Power Allows you to turn VES ON and OFF If Equipped e VES Lock Locks out rear VES remote controls If Equipped e VES CH1 CH2 Allows the user to change mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pressing the Audio Select button If Equipped e Set Home Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow user to set the clock Turn the TUNE control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE control knob again to save changes e Player Defaults Selecting this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items
303. se 4 4 92 1 ob d olds ok dnbie 376 Fluid M 396 Miaintenanee 4 5 aia scene ae xk y Sowa 24 oO 376 HO 432 INDEX ME Transmission eee ee eee 255 260 Automate sest eerie C5 sg kW REED 255 260 PW C C 396 Maintenance llle 374 375 Manual oi cei evs y e RR wee eta se 249 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry ek ao e RR RERBA E Ea Re 24 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 137 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry 1e aes that Are e eg du ue e qoe mon 24 Tread Wear Indicators 000050 291 Trip COmputet Les secedere o paint hEN Eih 180 lup Odometer esceas etere hse RE es 177 Trip Odometer Reset Button 179 Tum Signals cbe dow xw 125 171 390 391 392 UConnect Hands Free Phone 87 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 412 Universal Transmitter lees 137 Upholstery Care Vacuum Vapor Harnesses Vanity Mirrors ee 86 Variance Compass less 182 190 Vehicle Certification Label 313 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 7 Vehicle Loading 16 sive es kms 284 313 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 8 Vehicle Storage a lt u ne ex Ihr En nie 240 Video Entertainment System Rear Seat Video System ies eee RR ERE EERT 231 Viscosity Engine Qil ss seses ds ahg ede mes 356 Warning Flasher Hazard sey ccresesss siesat 334 Warning Lights
304. se only the manufacturer s recommended fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type NOTE Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering pump may make noise for a short period of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and does not in any way damage the steering system Driveline And Steering Component Lubrication All driveline and steering components are sealed and do not require lubrication Driveshafts are not serviceable Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks doors tailgate and hood hinges should be lubricated periodically to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the appli cation of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching compo nents to insure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the fall and spring Apply a small ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365 amount of a high qu
305. seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to ensure you have the right seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a missile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap can become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s Size ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 Infants and Child Restraints e Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger airbag unless the airbag is turned off An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 Ibs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats WARNING e The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It
306. sen Y eee Ee 3 ae e 144 WindoWS ssa bep RunrR E ERG RR PERS 33 Power Steering Fluid 0040 396 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 48 Preparation for Jacking sicer ecese tiesias arei 338 Pretensioners Seat Belt esere ze p Siew a e ae RE 46 Programmable Electronic Features 193 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entty carea 20 Gene anato San eae ees 24 Radial Ply Tires ise et x RE ER ads 290 Radio Broadcast Signals 0 196 Radio Navigation 0000005 225 Radio Satellite llle 226 227 Rear Axle Differential 0 377 Rear Window Defroster 0005 159 Rear Window Features 0 0000 ees 157 Rear Wiper Washer 0000000 nats 157 Rearview Mirrors 0 000 e eee eens 83 Reclining Front Seats 000004 114 Recorder Event Data 0 0 0 0 0 ee eens 64 Recreational Towing 0000000 330 Reformulated Gasoline sss 307 HO 428 INDEX MM Refrigerant amp e th e rade yos EROR Re OR RR 363 Release Hood 14 25 66 re 121 Reminder Lights On 00040 124 Reminder Seat Belt 0 000000 46 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 20 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 233 Remote Starting System less 25 Replacement Keys 0 000000 cece 15 Replacement Parts 353 Replacement Tires 0 0 000 0000
307. sher 334 Headlight Switch 00000 123 Headlights as pas tehta pae eee eee eee 389 Illuminated Entry lille 19 Instrument Cluster 0005 123 168 Intetiot 5g esso ea en ete ire r 122 Lights On Reminder 000 124 Low Fuel 2i RTRRRTER Rue 168 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 178 PASSING cenis ede eiue REA drene 124 Rear Servicing cioe aor died ale date din pap 392 Rearlaln 22 2904 REPRE POP 392 Seat Belt Reminder llle 169 DOLVICE 840 Gane a e acidi Ce reae d eons 389 en INDEX 425 Side Marker uude sang nee ace Ree eae RS RC 392 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 296 Traction Control aes dee ea pada bees ae wees 135 Turn Signal 122 2202 34 daa pares 125 390 391 392 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 168 Load Floor Cargo esege ea a a e a N 154 Load N Go Sliding Cargo Floor llli ss 156 Loading Vehicle llle 313 Tires sexe Cabe UB atone IURE Ut e FRU 4 283 LOCKS 2xaa d eRRRXURRRAG RES ODRPISUPERRE 27 Child Protection sicas sr padeda eR 32 DOOF exe kme c be 9 ek n RERPRRUR Pe E egg 27 Powet DOO xg ERE e ERES 29 Steering Wheel races yer Caw EROR RR 17 Low Tire Pressure System 04 296 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH gsi seg aa e a quo hed a e Rue SUR a a d 70 71 Lubrication Body 4k ke eem xn 364 Luggage Carrier apasiona a hae ace m Re 160 Maintenance Free
308. shift the selector lever out of P Park or N Neutral if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal R Reverse Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop N Neutral Shift into N Neutral when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle NOTE Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with selector lever in N Neutral can result in severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Section 5 and Towing a Disabled Vehicle in Section 6 of this manual D Drive For most city and highway driving 2 Second For moderate grades and to assist braking on dry pave ment or in mud and snow Begins at a stop in low gear with automatic upshift to 2nd gear Will not shift to 3rd ee STARTING AND OPERATING 257 1 First For hard pulling at low speeds in mud sand snow or on steep grades Begins and stays in low gear with no upshift Provides engine compression braking at low speeds Overdrive Operation The overdrive automatic transmission contains an elec tro
309. signed to use as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Jack Storage Location E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 337 Spare Tire Stowage The spare tire is stowed underneath the rear of the vehicle and is held in place by a cable winch mechanism Spare Tire Removal Fit the jack handle extension over the drive nut Use the Lug Wrench to rotate the nut counter clockwise until the spare is on the ground with enough slack in the cable to allow you to pull the tire out from under the vehicle Lowering Raising Spare Tire 338 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME CAUTION e Turn the ignition to the LOCK position WARNING The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack extension tube only Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and they can damage the winch Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel When the spare is clear tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the center of the wheel Tinan the Tand Warne Flaghes Preparations ForJacking e Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally oppo site of the jacking position For example if changing the right front tire block the left
310. sition e Display Units of Measure in To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until US or METRIC appears To Reset The Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 189 button once to clear the resettable function being dis played To reset all resettable functions press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within 3 seconds of resetting the currently displayed function gt Reset ALL will display during this 3 second window Compass Display The compass readings indicate the direction OD the vehicle is facing Press and release the compass button to display one of eight com pass readings and the outside temperature Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 turns in an area free from large metal or metallic 190 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se objects until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into t
311. sono ae 335 Star hg ci kad eds ey deer a der ese Rae 245 Temperature Gauge seis eiae nen 168 Engine Oil Viscosity asss wa EES ss 356 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart issus 356 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 62 Entry System Illuminated 19 Event Data Recorder 00 00000 64 Exhaust Gas Caution 0 0004 76 309 nn INDEX 421 Exhaust SysteM sacs ak Hehe ee ae eR 366 Exterior Finish Care llle 378 Fabrice Care 2464 ea 464 de ek der va 379 380 Filters Air Cleaner dade EAE NUR 361 Engine Fuel cia 2 22 e hes 361 Engine Oll so cote cet RARI eee edd 357 395 Finish Care css gna ea ce ek xd oak P SER EX 378 Flashers Hazard Warning 0 0 66 0 eee eee ee 334 Tarn Signal mtn 171 390 391 392 Flooded Engine Starting 0 246 Floor Console 1 0 cee ees 152 Ehud Brake 2432 96e oe eh ae ES 396 Fluid Capacities s orae kane nn aoe aes 394 Ehud Leaks ccc d 6 3 odo BAe n bik denies 78 Fluid Level Checks 0 0 0 eee eee 377 Automatic Transmission 374 Engine OW xis I Rd Rao 354 Manual Transmission LL 375 Powe t Dte ting oui eg cas EX Egi panes 363 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 395 Fog Light Service 2 eee ee 391 Fog Lights sem eee Re end 124 391 Folding Rear Seater neirinne eii eee 118 Four Wheel Drive ellen 265 iecur Ap LEE 265 SYSTE
312. spinning wheel no matter what the speed Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced WORN TIRE These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 inch 2 mm When the indicators appear in 2 or more adjacent grooves the tire should be replaced Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this point 292 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed refer to the paragraph on Tread
313. ss the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts You can also press the Voice Recognition button anytime while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the UCon nect system will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 feet the vehicle Delete UConnect Paired Cellular Phones Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 e You can also press the Voice Recognition button anytime while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your UConnect System UConnect Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the Phone button and say UConnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the UConnect system Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two procedures From outside the UConnect mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the Voice Recognitio
314. stage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity Along with the seat belts the front airbags provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Window bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions The front airbags deploy in moderate to severe frontal collisions NOTE The passenger front airbag may not deploy even when the driver front airbag has if the Occupant Classi fication System refer to Occupant Classification System in this section has determined the passenger seat is empty or is occupied by someone that is classified in the child size category This could be a child teenager or even a adult The window bag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to severe side and rollover colli sions In certain types of collisions both the front and side airbags may be triggered But even in collisions where the airbags deploy you need the seat belts to keep you in the right position for the airbags to protect you properly Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger airbag An airbag deployment could caus
315. still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position To attach a child restraint tether strap Route the tether strap over the seat back and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat For the outboard seating positions route the tether over the head rests and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts Tether Strap Mounting 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine in your new vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle a
316. sty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and tailgate must be kept clear and open ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379 If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibil ity of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc assure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches or chips as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil use Mopar Wheel Cleaner or select a non abrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only Mo par cleaners are recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car
317. sure Driving on a signifi cantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to 176 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replace ment or alternate tires and wheels allo
318. system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESP cor rects for over under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counter acting the over under steer condition Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESP applies the brake of the appropri ate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than e The ESP TCS Indicator Light located in the active The ESP TCS Indicator Light also accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure appropriate for the steering wheel position ESP TCS Indicator Light instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes flashes when TCS is active If the ESP TCS Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 WARNING ESP Electronic Stability Program cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the ve
319. t side of the instrument cluster to access the compass trip computer displays Display Button 182 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS See Trip Conditions Trip Odometer ODO This display shows the distance traveled since the last reset Press and release the right button on the instru ment cluster to switch from odometer to trip A or trip B Press and hold the right button while the odometer trip odometer is displayed to reset Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for trip A since the last reset Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for trip B since the last reset Compass Temperature Display Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic North and Geographic North In some areas of the country the difference between magnetic and geographic North is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings In order to ensure compass accuracy the com pass variance should be properly set according to the compass variance map zone that the vehicle is in COMPASS VARIANCE MAP 8040bf97 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 183 NOTE Magnetic materials should be kept away from the top of the right rear quarter window This is where the compass sensor is located To Set the Variance Start the engine and leave the transmission in the P Park position Press and hold approximately ten sec onds the odometer trip odometer reset button until the current variance zone number is displ
320. t the total occupant and luggage load inside the vehicle plus the load on the luggage rack do not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity CAUTION To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately Long loads which extend over the windshield such as wood panels or surfboards should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle Place a blanket or other protection between the surface of the roof and the load Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack Wind forces due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic can add sudden upward loads This is espe cially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 WARNING Cargo must be securely tied before driving your vehicle Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle particularly at high speeds resulting in per sonal injury or property damage Follow the roof rack Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS CONTENTS Bl Instrument Panel And Controls 166 Wi Instrument Cluster 0000 167 B Instrument Cluster Description 168 ll Compass And Trip Computer If Equipped 180
321. t tighten properly the Malfunction Indicator Light will come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled WARNING A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a CHECK GASCAP message will be displayed in the EVIC Electronic Vehicle Information Center Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center in Section 4 of this manual Tighten the fuel filler cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is properly tightened Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System OBDII in Section 7 of this manual for more information CAUTION Damage to the fuel system or emission control sys tem could result from using an improper fuel tank filler cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system ee STARTING AND OPERATING 313 WARNING e Never add fuel when the engine is running e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel cap is removed or the tank filled VEHICLE LOADING Certification Label As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration Regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed t
322. t types Program Type 16 Digit Character Display No program type or un inc None Adult Hits Adlt Hit Classical Classicl Classic Rock Cls Rock College College Country Country Foreign Language Language Information Inform Jazz Jazz News News Program Type 16 Digit Character Display Nostalgia Nostalga Oldies Oldies Personality Persnlty Public Public Rhythm and Blues R amp B Religious Music Rel Musc Religious Talk Rel Talk Rock Rock Soft Soft Soft Rock Soft Rck Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Sports Sports Talk Talk Top 40 Top 40 Weather Weather 202 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items NOTE Use the Tune Control Knob to scroll through the entries Push the Audio Select button to select an entry and make changes e DVD Enter When the disc is in DVD Menu mode selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current highlighted selection Use the remote control to
323. taining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle at or above maximum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Don t drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident Al ways use radial tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your dealer for radial tire repairs Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels above 35 mph 55 km h ee STARTING AND OPERATING 291 WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 35 mph 55 km h when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a
324. the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Temporary Spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M High Flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT 280 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light Truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary Spare tire 31 Overall Diameter in Inches in 215 Section Width in Millimeters mm 65 Aspect Ratio in Percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section Width in Inches in R Construction Code R means Radial Construction D means Diagonal or Bias Construction 15 Rim Diameter in Inches in E STARTING AND OPERATING 281 EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
325. the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile version 0 96 or higher See UConnect website for sup ported phones NOTE For UConnect customer support visit the following web sites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e wWw jeep com uconnect e or call 1 877 855 8400 UConnect allows you to transfer calls between the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s micro phone for private conversation The UConnect phone book enables you to store up to 32 names and four numbers per name Each language has a separate 32 name phone book accessible only in that language This system is driven through your Blue tooth Hands Free profile cellular phone UConnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station so UCon nect works no matter where you stow your cellular phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicles UConnect system The UConnect system allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages as equipped Phone Button The rearview mirror contains the microphone uy amp f
326. the following e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more e Occupant Restraint Control Module E severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In e Airbag Warning Light some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all e Driver Airbag Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags e Passenger Airbag Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument e Side Curtain Airbags above Side Windows panel during airbag deployment could cause seri ous injury Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel e Side Remote Acceleration Sensors Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel The side curtain airbags need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat Interconnecting Wiring 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Front Remote Acceleration Sensors Seat Track Position Sensors STPS If Present Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioner Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Retractors Occupant Classification System OCS Front Pas senger Seat Only Occupant Classification Module Passenger Airbag Disable PAD Indicator Light Weight Sensors How The Airbag System Works e The Occupant Restraint Control ORC Module de termines if a frontal side or rollover collision is severe enough to requ
327. the problem persists P Park R Reverse and N Neutral will continue to operate Only Second gear range will operate in the D Drive shifter position Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been added to the automatic transmission of this vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly differ ent feeling or response during normal operation in high gear When the vehicle speed drops or during accelera tion the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages 260 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 5 Speed Automatic Transmission 4 0L Engine The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles Automatic Shift Controls Gear Ranges NOTE After selecting any gear range wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating This is especially important when the engine is cold If there is a need to restart the engine be sure to cycle the key to the LOCK position before restarting Transmission ee STARTING AND OPERATING 261 gear engagement may be delayed after restarting the engine if the key is not cycled
328. ting System The controls for the heating air conditioning and venti lation system in this vehicle consist of a series of rotary knobs These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions 81900957 Manual Air Conditioning and Heating Controls The instrument panel features four airflow registers Two registers are located on the outer ends of the instrument panel and two are located in the center of the instrument panel These registers can be fully closed to partially block airflow and they can be adjusted to direct airflow where the occupant desires Blower Control 8191de0d Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select The fan speed increases as you turn the outer control ring to the right from the OFF position 236 Temperature Control 8191de18 NOTE Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air in side the passenger compart ment The blue area of the scale indicates cooler tem peratures while the red area indicates warmer tempera tures If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumula tion of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce air flow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance Mode
329. ting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic 354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed maintenance intervals there are other items that should operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance However if a malfunction of these items does occur it could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance These items should be inspected if a malfunction is observed or suspected Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle s engine the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5 minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Always maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick Adding one quart of oi
330. tions were met 8192b99e Power Sunroof Switch es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 Opening Sunroof Express WARNING Press the switch rearward and release and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully and stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof e Never leave children in a vehicle with the keys in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious Closing Sunroof Express injury or death Press the switch forward and release and the sunroof In an accident there is a greater risk of being will close automatically from any position The sunroof thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You will close fully and stop automatically This is called could also be seriously injured or killed Always Express Close During Express Close operation any fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all movement of the switch will stop the sunroof passengers are properly secured too Pinch Protect Feature Do not allow small children to operate the sun This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of roof Never allow fingers or other body parts or the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob any object to project through the sun
331. tives The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks The use of transmission sealers should be avoided as they may adversely affect seals Hydraulic Clutch Fluid Manual Transmission The clutch hydraulic system is fed by a segregated volume of fluid within the brake system master cylinder reservoir In the event of leakage or wear use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type Manual Transmission Selection of Lubricant Use only manufacturer s recommended manual trans mission fluid refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a point not more than 3 16 4 76 mm below the bottom of the hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Frequency of Fluid Change Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle Fluid changes are not necessary unless the lubricant has become contaminated with water If con taminated with water the fluid should be changed im mediately 376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Transfer Case Fluid Level Check The fluid level should
332. to a cycle every second if the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph 16 km h If the vehicle speed is less than 10 mph 16 km h the delay can be regulated from a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between cycles to a cycle every 2 seconds Windshield Wiper Operation Move the lever upward to the second detent for LO speed wiper operation or to the third detent for HI speed operation Windshield Wiper Washer Switch Windshield Washers To use the washer pull the lever toward you and hold while spray is desired If the lever is pulled while in the delay range the wiper will operate for two wipe cycles after the lever is released and then resume the intermit tent interval previously selected ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 If the lever is pulled while in the OFF position the wipers will operate for as long as the lever is held plus two wipe cycles then turn OFF Mist Feature Push down on the wiper lever to activate a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle As long as the lever is held down the wipers will continue to operate TILT STEERING COLUMN To tilt the column push down on the lever under the multi function control lever and move the wheel up or down as desired Pull the lever back upwards to lock the column firmly in place Tilt Steering Column WARNING Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is moving is dangerous Without a stable steering column
333. to move 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped Sun Visor Slide Out Feature An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor To use The sun visor slide on rod feature allows for addi the mirror rotate the sun visor down and swing the tional flexibility in positioning the visor to block out the mirror cover upward The lights will turn on automati sun cally Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light LE M ju uu E T T m Fold down sun visor 2 Unclip visor from center clip 3 Pull the sun visor toward inside rearview mirror to extend Illuminated Vanity Mirror ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION UConnect IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code RER radio contains an inte grated Hands Free Communication UConnect sys tem Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for UConnect system operating instructions for this radio UConnect is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system UConnect allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your cellular phone s audio is trans mitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the UConnect system NOTE The UConnect system use requires a cellular phone equipped with
334. to the LOCK position first P Park This gear position supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use P Park while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range Always apply parking brake first then place the selector in P Park position WARNING Never use P Park position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage WARNING It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of P Park or N Neutral if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal R Reverse Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop 262 STARTING AND OPERATING ME N Neutral Shift into N Neutral when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle NOTE Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with selector lever in N Neutral can result in severe transmission damage Refer to Recreationa
335. tomatically on vehicles with power door locks if all of the following conditions are met The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled The transmission is in gear All doors are closed 1 2 3 4 5 6 The throttle is pressed The vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h The doors were not previously locked using the power door lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Automatic Door Locks Programming The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled as follows For vehicles equipped with a Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual for details For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK 4 times ending up in the LOCK position 3 Depress the power door lock switch to lock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accor dance with local laws Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if 1 The Automatic Unlock
336. traffic While stopped put transmission in N Neutral but do not increase engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition If your air conditioner is on turn it off The air conditioning system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning off the A C removes this heat You can also turn the Temperature Control to maximum heat the Mode Control to floor and the Fan Control to High This allows the heater core to act asa supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call for service 336 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Sx JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING Jack Location The scissor type jack and tire changing tools are located WARNING in the left rear trim panel behind the second row seat e Getting under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift The jack is de
337. tting dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the setting is Normal Aspect Ratio If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose between wide screen pan scan and letter box AutoPlay If Equipped When this is set to ON and a DVD video is inserted it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie In some rare cases the DVD player may not auto play the main title In such cases use the menu button on the remote control to select desired title to play NOTE The user will have to set these defaults before loading a disc If changes are made to these settings after E INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 205 a disc is loaded changes will not be effective Also the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer preferred settings AM and FM Buttons Radio Mode Press the buttons to select AM or FM Modes SET Button Radio Mode To Set the Push Button Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to push button memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into push button memory You may add a second station to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press th
338. u in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away e The Occupant Classification System OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle It is designed to turn off the front passenger airbag for an empty seat and for occupants classified in a category other than an adult This could be a child teenager or even a adult 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee NOTE Children 12 years and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint e The Passenger Airbag Disable PAD Indicator Light an amber light located in the center of the instrument panel tells the driver and front passenger when the front passenger airbag is turned off The PAD Indi cator Light illuminates the words PASS AIR BAG OFF to show that the passenger airbag will not inflate during a collision requiring airbags When the right front passenger seat is empty or when very light objects are placed on the seat the passenger airbag will not inflate even though the PAD Indicator Light illumi d Indicator Light Location Eee The PAD Indicator Light should not be illuminated when a adult passenger is properly seated in the front passenger seat In this case the airbag is ready to be inflated if a collision requiring an airbag occurs ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFO
339. uch as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat 60 40 Split Folding Rear Seat with Fold Flat Feature To provide additional storage area each rear seat can be folded flat to allow for extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating room The rear seatback also reclines for additional passenger comfort Pull the release strap while sitting in the rear seat to recline the seatback es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Rear Seat Release Strap NOTE Prior to folding the rear seat it may be necessary to reposition the front seat to its mid track position Also be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward This will allow the rear seat to fold down easily 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To Lower Rear Seat 4 If desired push down on the seatback to lock it in the 1 Locate the release strap on the lower outboard side of folded position each rear seatback To Raise Rear Seat If locked in the folded position pull the release strap toward the front of the ve
340. ularly involv verter will not require maintenance However it is im ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst ued operation of your vehicle with a severe damage malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle 360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam age Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing Do not idle t
341. uoces san eae Oe a ke eae FUR Ra 394 Dipstick ere ieg us c eee used 354 FIET 1o cse acte tents ae aos toss 357 395 Identification Logo sisse 356 Materials Added to 0000 357 Recommendation leen 356 394 Viscosity sk e dye e EET E 356 394 Onboard Diagnostic System 350 351 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 137 Outside Rearview Mirrors 0 0 84 Overdrive 2 0 0 0c eee 175 257 263 Overdrive OFF Switch 0 257 263 Overheating Engine 205 169 335 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 410 Paint Cate ieu dah as Se ha 377 Paint Damage cciz sceasx ye csaa eed 377 Panic Alari uueeedetg acuta hind ne e aps E ies 23 Parking Brake x si sit Pda eere e es 272 Parking On Hill goat etek ae SRERRS 272 Passing Light uere ce ee ms 124 en INDEX 427 PCW Valve hai seen hee ee Bate ae RE RR 361 Personal Settings cue sere c3 e DE n 193 Pets sous Race RARO qe ERES RAI 75 Pets Transporting 6 6 cee eee 75 Phone Cellular eere 87 Phone Hands Free UConnect 87 Placard Tire and Loading Information 283 Polishing and Waxing 00006 378 Power Distribution Center Fuses 381 Door Locks resgarri rrapi h ea 29 l vertet cem c beber hee hen 149 MirfOIS cae RR x EE eee a err ps 85 Steermg xoi vba ces eA See AU RD TR 277 363 SuntOoO r
342. utton to exit Telephone If Equipped Press and release the MENU button until Telephone displays in the EVIC When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC pro vides the following telephone information COMPASS VARIANCE MAP e00ccbab 192 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS e Phone status idle voice mail roaming battery strength and signal strength in increments of 20 percent e Call status Incoming call connecting connected air time in minutes and seconds call ended call failed roaming and no phone connection UConnect Active Caller ID phone number display When the appropriate conditions exist and if supported by the cell phone the EVIC will display the following telephone symbols The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate the signal strength of the UConnect phone The W number of horizontal bars increases as the Signal strength of the UConnect phone signal in Strength creases v Incom ing Call n Analog IN Roam ing The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate an incoming call The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that the UConnect phone is currently in analog mode The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that the UConnect phone is currently roaming The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that you have voice mail Voice Mail The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate a E text message Text Message The EVIC displays this symbol to
343. uttons Press the buttons to select AM or FM Modes SET Button To Set the Push Button Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to push button memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into push button memory You may add a second station to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into push button memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push button twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 219 Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to push button memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio NOTE This Radio is capable of playing compact discs C
344. w the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warnings have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result E INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 177 26 OdometerlTrip Odometer The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage To toggle between the odometer and the trip odometer press the Odometer Trip Odometer Button To reset the Trip Odometer press and hold the button while in trip mode until the Trip Odometer resets If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged GASCAP will be displayed in the instrument cluster Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odom eter reset button to turn the GASCAP message off If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started U S federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven The
345. washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped YES Essentials seats may be cleaned in the following manner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel 7 380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e For tough stains apply Mopar Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply Mopar Multi Purpose Cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essen tials products Interior Care Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth a damp cloth with Mopar Total Clean then Mopar Spot amp Stain Remover if absolutely necessary Do not use harsh cleaners or Armorall Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner
346. ways back straight down a hill in R Reverse gear carefull Never back down a hill in N Neutral using only the brake ee STARTING AND OPERATING 271 Remember never drive diagonally across a hill always drive straight up or down If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by turning the front wheels slowly left and right This may provide a fresh bite into the surface and will usually provide traction to complete the climb Traction Downhill Shift the transmission into a low gear and the transfer case to 4L or 4LO range Let the vehicle go slowly down the hill with all four wheels turning against engine compression drag This will permit you to control the vehicle speed and direction When descending mountains or hills repeated braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking control Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmis sion whenever possible After Driving Off Road Off road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on road driving After going off road it is always a good idea to check for damage That way you can get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it e Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle Check tires body structure steering suspension and exhaust system for damage Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on the chassis drivetra
347. when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times to reduce or prevent injuries Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle have combination lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is de signed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions But in a colli sion the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas sengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size A THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door
348. will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for 3 seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically In addition the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration 306 STARTING AND OPERATING The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses United States llle KR55120123 Canada cs PIS ERES REG 2671 5120123 FUEL REQUIREMENTS 3 7L Engine If Equipped The 3 7L engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excel 87 lent fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded regular 800dfab gasoline having an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recom mended
349. wing format types ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 217 Program Type 16 Digit Character Display Program Type 16 Digit Character Display No program type or un Mons Religious Music Rel Musc defined Religious Talk Rel Talk Adult Hits Adlt Hit Rock Rock Classical Classicl Soft Soft Classic Rock Cls Rock Soft Rock Soft Rck College College Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Country Country Sports Sports Foreign Language Language Talk Talk Information Inform Top 40 Top 40 Jazz Jazz Weather Weather Do News By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon Nostalgia Nostalga is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency Oldies Oldies station with the same selected Music Type name The Personality Persnlty Music Type function only operates when in the FM Public Public mode Rhythm and Blues R amp B 218 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS ME If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow user to set the clock Turn the TUNE control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE control knob again to save changes AM and FM B
350. work configurations this is normal e Some paging and voicemail systems have system timeout settings too short that may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Recognition button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command immediately For example if a prompt is playing Would you like to pair a phone clear 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M a you could press the Voice Recognition button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts On Off Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the UConnect sys tem will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The UConnect system will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cell phone the UConnect system will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using UConnect The status is given for roaming net work signal strength phone battery strength etc
351. x could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose e Vehicle pull to right or left control and have an accident Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having ad Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull left or right equate speed capability can result in sudden tire Alignment will not correct this problem See your autho failure and loss of vehicle control rized dealer for proper diagnosis 204 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out of SAUTIONI balance Proper balancing will reduce vibration and To avoid damage to your vehicle tires or chains observe the avoid tire cupping and spotty wear following precautions e Because of limited chain clearance between tires and other TIRE CHAINS suspension components it is important that only chains in Use Class S chains or other traction aids that meet SAE good condition are used Broken chains can cause serious vehicle damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could suggest chain breakage Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use Type S specifications NOTE Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle as recommended by the chain manufacturer Install chains as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about 1 2 mile 0 8 km Do not exceed 45 mph 72 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps
352. y Grades sse ee ret Rn 412 H if You Need Assistance sse 406 Treadwear sees 412 Bl Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only 409 Traction Grades lt eese cer aia la Mopar Parts ciere eI ter ees 409 Temperature Grades 406 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an ap pointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and service
353. ys on the face of the radio 5 The time setting will change each time you press the HOUR or MIN soft key 6 Press the SAVE soft key on the face of the radio Changing the Time Zone 1 Press the Time soft key on the lower left side of the face of the radio 2 Press the Set Time Zone soft key on the face of the radio 3 Select the appropriate time zone for your location and press the SAVE soft key to store your selection NOTE When you are traveling and enter a new time zone the clock must be reset manually for the new zone ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 227 Changing Daylight Savings Time 1 Press the Time soft key on the lower left side of the face of the radio 2 Press the Daylight Savings soft key when Daylight Savings Time is in effect 3 Press the SAVE soft key on the face of the radio Press the CANCEL soft key to exit from the clock setting mode SATELLITE RADIO RSC IF EQUIPPED RER REQ REN RADIOS ONLY Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satel lite Radio This service offers up to 100 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of SIRIUS audio se
354. ysler Corpora tion to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation DaimlerChrysler Corporation product involving a 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise required by law Data Parameters that May Be Recorded Diagnostic trouble code s and warning lamp status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system Airbag disable lamp status if equipped Time of airbag deployment in terms of ignition cycles and vehicle mileage Airbag deployment level if applicable Impact acceleration and angle Seat belt status Brake status service and parking brakes Accelerator status including vehicle speed Engine control status including engine speed Transmission gear selection 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee e Cruise control status e Traction stability control status e Tire pressure monitoring system status Child Restraint Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time babies and children too Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck led up in a rear

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

1132 Kincaid Bridge Road • P.O. Box 1176 • Winnsboro, South  User Manual for GSM alarm iOS APP  Manuel D`Utilisation  Manual de instrucciones S 20  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file